http://events.brucecareyrestaurants.com/bluehour (24jun14)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@34385 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

95 files changed, 656 insertions, 324 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
index f2500e2c364..405e74a34b5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/RELEASE
@@ -1,3 +1,45 @@
+RELEASE NOTES FOR VERSION 2.9a
+
+* Biber version 1.9 is required for biblatex 2.9a
+* Fixed some bugs with defernumbers option
+* With biber, the scanner for \mkcomprange will normalise any sequence of
+  dashes with \bibrangedash and any (optionally space-surrounded) comma or
+  semi-colon with \bibrangessep (see docs). Range compression now works
+  properly in citation notes.
+
+RELEASE NOTES FOR VERSION 2.9
+
+* Biber version 1.9 is required for biblatex 2.9
+* With biber, the \printshorthands functionality is subsumed under a more
+  general "bibliography list" functionality. See the documentation for
+  \printbiblist and the new examples file "92-bibliographylists.tex".
+  Previous list of shorthands macros have legacy aliases for backwards
+  compatibility.
+* INCOMPATIBLE CHANGE - The generalisation of the \printshorthands facility
+  into a bibliography list printing facility necessitated changing the
+  default bibliography environment name for printing shorthands from
+  "shorthands" to "shorthand" so that it matches the field name it uses.
+  This allows the other relevant "short*" fields to be automatically
+  available with environments, filters etc. for building bibliography lists
+  of abbreviations. The same applies to the default "shorthands" driver
+  which is now called "shorthand". If you (re)define either the "shorthands"
+  bibliography environment or the "shorthands" driver in your style, please
+  change the names to remove the "s" or you will pick up the internal
+  defaults instead.
+* The data model defining macros are no longer valid in a document
+  (including the preamble). They in fact only ever partially worked as
+  biblatex uses the data model to define some internal macros before the
+  preamble and document is read. Using these macros in a document would
+  lead to strange behaviour sooner or later and so now they are disabled
+  after the data model is loaded and will generate a warning.
+* The "sortlocale" option no longer passes its value to the biber option of
+  the same name. Biblatex now has its own "sortlocale" option which is used
+  to set the global sorting locale on sorting specifications which don't
+  define one. The ability to define sorting locales per-sortscheme is new
+  in this version. See the PDF documentation. This is unlikely to impact
+  anyone. The biber "sortlocale" option can be use to override the
+  biblatex-specified sorting locales if you need to.
+
 RELEASE NOTES FOR VERSION 2.8a
 
 * INCOMPATIBLE CHANGE - The "language" option has new values. "language=autobib" changes
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
index a50268f2954..89fed89c9d9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
index 6a2d845e90d..7803b36db6a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/biblatex.tex
@@ -1,12 +1,9 @@
 \documentclass{ltxdockit}[2011/03/25]
 \usepackage{btxdockit}
 \usepackage{fontspec}
-\usepackage[mono=false]{libertine}
-% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dejavu
-\setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase]{DejaVu Sans Mono}
-%\setmainfont[Ligatures=TeX]{TeXGyrePagella}
-%\setsansfont[Ligatures=TeX]{TexGyreHeros}
-%\setmonofont[Ligatures=NoCommon]{TeXGyreCursor}
+\setmonofont[Scale=MatchLowercase,Ligatures=TeX]{DejaVu Sans Mono}
+\setmainfont[Ligatures=TeX]{Linux Libertine O}
+\setsansfont[Ligatures=TeX]{Linux Biolinum O}
 \usepackage[american]{babel}
 \usepackage[strict]{csquotes}
 \usepackage{tabularx}
@@ -47,13 +44,13 @@
   http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/}
 
 \titlepage{%
-  title={The \sty{biblatex} Package},
+  title={The \biblatex Package},
   subtitle={Programmable Bibliographies and Citations},
   url={\biblatexhome},
   author={Philipp Lehman \\(with Philip Kime, Audrey Boruvka and Joseph Wright)},
   email={},
-  revision={2.8a},
-  date={25/11/2013}}
+  revision={2.9a},
+  date={24/06/2014}}
 
 \hypersetup{%
   pdftitle={The \biblatex Package},
@@ -126,6 +123,10 @@
   \textcolor{spot}{\margnotefont BibTeX only}}
 \newrobustcmd*{\BibTeXOnlyMark}{%
   \leavevmode\marginpar{\BibTeXOnly}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\LF}{%
+  \textcolor{spot}{\margnotefont Label field}}
+\newrobustcmd*{\LFMark}{%
+  \leavevmode\marginpar{\LF}}
 
 \hyphenation{%
   star-red
@@ -142,13 +143,13 @@
 \section{Introduction}
 \label{int}
 
-This document is a systematic reference manual for the \sty{biblatex} package. Look at the sample documents which ship with \sty{biblatex} to get a first impression.\fnurl{\biblatexctan/doc/examples}
+This document is a systematic reference manual for the \biblatex package. Look at the sample documents which ship with \biblatex to get a first impression.\fnurl{\biblatexctan/doc/examples}
 For a quick start guide, browse \secref{int:abt, bib:typ, bib:fld, bib:use, use:opt, use:xbx, use:bib, use:cit, use:use}.
 
-\subsection[About]{About \sty{biblatex}}
+\subsection[About]{About \biblatex}
 \label{int:abt}
 
-This package provides advanced bibliographic facilities for use with \latex in conjunction with \bibtex. The package is a complete reimplementation of the bibliographic facilities provided by \latex. A custom backend \biber by default is used which processes the \bibtex format data files and them performs all sorting, label generation (and a great deal more). Legacy \bibtex is also supported as a backend, albeit with a reduced feature set. Biblatex does not use the backend to format the bibliography information as with traditional \bibtex: instead of being implemented in \bibtex style files, the formatting of the bibliography is entirely controlled by TeX macros. Good working knowledge in \latex should be sufficient to design new bibliography and citation styles. There is no need to learn \bibtex's postfix stack language. This package also supports subdivided bibliographies, multiple bibliographies within one document, and separate lists of bibliographic shorthands. Bibliographies may be subdivided into parts and\slash or segmented by topics. Just like the bibliography styles, all citation commands may be freely defined. With \biber as the backend, features such as customisable sorting, multiple bibliographies with different sorting, customisable labels, dynamic data modification are available. Please refer to \secref{int:pre:bibercompat} for information on \biber/\biblatex version compatibility. The package is completely localized and can interface with the \sty{babel} package. Please refer to \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} for a list of languages currently supported by this package.
+This package provides advanced bibliographic facilities for use with \latex in conjunction with \bibtex. The package is a complete reimplementation of the bibliographic facilities provided by \latex. A custom backend \biber by default is used which processes the \bibtex format data files and them performs all sorting, label generation (and a great deal more). Legacy \bibtex is also supported as a backend, albeit with a reduced feature set. Biblatex does not use the backend to format the bibliography information as with traditional \bibtex: instead of being implemented in \bibtex style files, the formatting of the bibliography is entirely controlled by TeX macros. Good working knowledge in \latex should be sufficient to design new bibliography and citation styles. There is no need to learn \bibtex's postfix stack language. This package also supports subdivided bibliographies, multiple bibliographies within one document, and separate lists of bibliographic information such as abbreviations of various fields. Bibliographies may be subdivided into parts and\slash or segmented by topics. Just like the bibliography styles, all citation commands may be freely defined. With \biber as the backend, features such as customisable sorting, multiple bibliographies with different sorting, customisable labels, dynamic data modification are available. Please refer to \secref{int:pre:bibercompat} for information on \biber/\biblatex version compatibility. The package is completely localized and can interface with the \sty{babel} package. Please refer to \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} for a list of languages currently supported by this package.
 
 \subsection{License}
 
@@ -157,7 +158,7 @@ Copyright \textcopyright\ 2006--2012 Philipp Lehman, 2012--2013 Philip Kime, Aud
 \subsection{Feedback}
 \label{int:feb}
 
-Please use the \sty{biblatex} project page on GitHub to report bugs and submit feature requests.\fnurl{http://github.com/plk/biblatex} Before making a feature request, please ensure that you have thoroughly studied this manual. If you do not want to report a bug or request a feature but are simply in need of assistance, you might want to consider posting your question on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup or \tex-\latex Stack Exchange.\fnurl{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/tagged/biblatex}
+Please use the \biblatex project page on GitHub to report bugs and submit feature requests.\fnurl{http://github.com/plk/biblatex} Before making a feature request, please ensure that you have thoroughly studied this manual. If you do not want to report a bug or request a feature but are simply in need of assistance, you might want to consider posting your question on the \texttt{comp.text.tex} newsgroup or \tex-\latex Stack Exchange.\fnurl{http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/tagged/biblatex}
 
 \subsection{Acknowledgments}
 
@@ -177,6 +178,7 @@ Håkon Malmedal (Norwegian);
 Anastasia Kandulina, Yuriy Chernyshov (Polish);
 José Carlos Santos (Portuguese);
 Oleg Domanov (Russian);
+Tea Tušar and Bogdan Filipič (Slovene);
 Ignacio Fernández Galván (Spanish);
 Per Starbäck, Carl-Gustav Werner, Filip Åsblom (Swedish).
  
@@ -188,21 +190,21 @@ This section gives an overview of all resources required by this package and dis
 \subsubsection{Requirements}
 \label{int:pre:req}
 
-The resources listed in this section are strictly required for \sty{biblatex} to function. The package will not work if they are not available.
+The resources listed in this section are strictly required for \biblatex to function. The package will not work if they are not available.
 
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[\etex]
-The \sty{biblatex} package requires \etex. \tex distributions have been shipping \etex binaries for quite some time, the popular distributions use them by default these days. The \sty{biblatex} package checks if it is running under \etex. Simply try compiling your documents as you usually do, the chances are that it just works. If you get an error message, try compiling the document with \bin{elatex} instead of \bin{latex} or \bin{pdfelatex} instead of \bin{pdflatex}, respectively.
+The \biblatex package requires \etex. \tex distributions have been shipping \etex binaries for quite some time, the popular distributions use them by default these days. The \biblatex package checks if it is running under \etex. Simply try compiling your documents as you usually do, the chances are that it just works. If you get an error message, try compiling the document with \bin{elatex} instead of \bin{latex} or \bin{pdfelatex} instead of \bin{pdflatex}, respectively.
 
 \item[\biber]
-\biber is the default backend of \sty{biblatex}. You only need one backend, either \bibtex or \biber. \biber comes with TeXLive and is also available from SourceForge.\fnurl{http://biblatex-biber.sourceforge.net/}
+\biber is the default backend of \biblatex. You only need one backend, either \bibtex or \biber. \biber comes with TeXLive and is also available from SourceForge.\fnurl{http://biblatex-biber.sourceforge.net/}. There are some slight differences in name parsing of <von> parts with \biber as compared with \bibtex which you probably won't normally notice. \biber uses the \texttt{btparse} C library for \bibtex format file parsing which aimed to be compatible with \bibtex's parsing rules but also aimed at correcting some of the common problems. For details, see the manual page for the Perl \texttt{Text::BibTeX} module\fnurl{http://search.cpan.org/~ambs/Text-BibTeX}.
 
 \item[\bibtex]
-The \sty{biblatex} package can use legacy \bibtex as a data backend. While a legacy \bibtex binary is sufficient to run \sty{biblatex}, using \bin{bibtex8} is recommended. If your \tex distribution does not ship with \bin{bibtex8}, you can get it from \acr{CTAN}.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/8-bit/}
+The \biblatex package can use legacy \bibtex as a data backend. While a legacy \bibtex binary is sufficient to run \biblatex, using \bin{bibtex8} is recommended. If your \tex distribution does not ship with \bin{bibtex8}, you can get it from \acr{CTAN}.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/8-bit/}
 
 \item[etoolbox]
-This \latex package, which is loaded automatically, provides generic programming facilities required by \sty{biblatex}. It is available from \acr{CTAN}.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/etoolbox/}
+This \latex package, which is loaded automatically, provides generic programming facilities required by \biblatex. It is available from \acr{CTAN}.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/etoolbox/}
 
 \item[kvoptions]
 This \latex package, which is also loaded automatically, is used for internal option handling. It is available with the \sty{oberdiek} package bundle from \acr{CTAN}.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/kvoptions}
@@ -212,35 +214,35 @@ This \latex package, which is also loaded automatically, provides a frontend for
 
 \end{marglist}
 
-Apart from the above resources, \sty{biblatex} also requires the standard \latex packages \sty{keyval} and \sty{ifthen} as well as the \sty{url} package. These package are included in all common \tex distributions and will be loaded automatically.
+Apart from the above resources, \biblatex also requires the standard \latex packages \sty{keyval} and \sty{ifthen} as well as the \sty{url} package. These package are included in all common \tex distributions and will be loaded automatically.
 
 \subsubsection{Recommended Packages}
 \label{int:pre:rec}
 
-The packages listed in this section are not required for \sty{biblatex} to function, but they provide recommended additional functions or enhance existing features. The package loading order does not matter.
+The packages listed in this section are not required for \biblatex to function, but they provide recommended additional functions or enhance existing features. The package loading order does not matter.
 
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[babel/polyglossia]
-The \sty{babel} and \sty{polyglossia} packages provides the core architecture for multilingual typesetting. If you are writing in a language other than American English, using one of these packages is strongly recommended. If loaded, \sty{biblatex} package will detect \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} automatically.
+The \sty{babel} and \sty{polyglossia} packages provides the core architecture for multilingual typesetting. If you are writing in a language other than American English, using one of these packages is strongly recommended. If loaded, \biblatex package will detect \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} automatically.
 
 \item[csquotes]
-If this package is available, \sty{biblatex} will use its language sensitive quotation facilities to enclose certain titles in quotation marks. If not, \sty{biblatex} uses quotes suitable for American English as a fallback. When writing in any other language, loading \sty{csquotes} is strongly recommended.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/csquotes/}
+If this package is available, \biblatex will use its language sensitive quotation facilities to enclose certain titles in quotation marks. If not, \biblatex uses quotes suitable for American English as a fallback. When writing in any other language, loading \sty{csquotes} is strongly recommended.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/csquotes/}
 
 \item[xpatch]
-The \sty{xpatch} package extends the patching commands of \sty{etoolbox} to \sty{biblatex} bibliography macros, drivers and formatting directives.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/xpatch/}
+The \sty{xpatch} package extends the patching commands of \sty{etoolbox} to \biblatex bibliography macros, drivers and formatting directives.\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/xpatch/}
 
 \end{marglist}
 
 \subsubsection{Compatible Classes and Packages}
 \label{int:pre:cmp}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides dedicated compatibility code for the classes and packages listed in this section.
+The \biblatex package provides dedicated compatibility code for the classes and packages listed in this section.
 
 \begin{marglist}
 
 \item[hyperref]
-The \sty{hyperref} package transforms citations into hyperlinks. See the \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} package options in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for further details. When using the \sty{hyperref} package, it is preferable to load it after \sty{biblatex}.
+The \sty{hyperref} package transforms citations into hyperlinks. See the \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} package options in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for further details. When using the \sty{hyperref} package, it is preferable to load it after \biblatex.
 
 \item[showkeys]
 The \sty{showkeys} package prints the internal keys of, among other things, citations in the text and items in the bibliography. The package loading order does not matter.
@@ -256,7 +258,7 @@ When using any of the \sty{scrartcl}, \sty{scrbook}, or \sty{scrreprt} classes,
 \subsubsection{Incompatible Packages}
 \label{int:pre:inc}
 
-The packages listed in this section are not compatible with \sty{biblatex}. Since it reimplements the bibliographic facilities of \latex from the ground up, \sty{biblatex} naturally conflicts with all packages modifying the same facilities. This is not specific to \sty{biblatex}. Some of the packages listed below are also incompatible with each other for the same reason.
+The packages listed in this section are not compatible with \biblatex. Since it reimplements the bibliographic facilities of \latex from the ground up, \biblatex naturally conflicts with all packages modifying the same facilities. This is not specific to \biblatex. Some of the packages listed below are also incompatible with each other for the same reason.
 
 \begin{marglist}
 
@@ -271,7 +273,7 @@ The packages listed in this section are not compatible with \sty{biblatex}. Sinc
 % bibtopicprefix
 
 \item[babelbib]
-The \sty{babelbib} package provides support for multilingual bibliographies. This is a standard feature of \sty{biblatex}. Use the \bibfield{langid} field and the package option \opt{autolang} for similar functionality. Note that \sty{biblatex} automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} is loaded. You only need the above mentioned features if you want to switch languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. See \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:opt:pre:gen} for details. Also see \secref{use:lng}.
+The \sty{babelbib} package provides support for multilingual bibliographies. This is a standard feature of \biblatex. Use the \bibfield{langid} field and the package option \opt{autolang} for similar functionality. Note that \biblatex automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel} or \sty{polyglossia} is loaded. You only need the above mentioned features if you want to switch languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. See \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:opt:pre:gen} for details. Also see \secref{use:lng}.
 
 \item[backref]
 The \sty{backref} package creates back references in the bibliography. See the package options \opt{hyperref} and \opt{backref} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for comparable functionality.
@@ -295,10 +297,10 @@ Another package for creating back references in the bibliography. See \sty{backr
 The \sty{inlinebib} package is designed for traditional citations given in footnotes. For comparable functionality, see the verbose citation styles in \secref{use:xbx:cbx}.
 
 \item[jurabib]
-Originally designed for citations in law studies and (mostly German) judicial documents, the \sty{jurabib} package also provides features aimed at users in the humanities. In terms of the features provided, there are some similarities between \sty{jurabib} and \sty{biblatex} but the approaches taken by both packages are quite different. Since both \sty{jurabib} and \sty{biblatex} are full"=featured packages, the list of similarities and differences is too long to be discussed here.
+Originally designed for citations in law studies and (mostly German) judicial documents, the \sty{jurabib} package also provides features aimed at users in the humanities. In terms of the features provided, there are some similarities between \sty{jurabib} and \biblatex but the approaches taken by both packages are quite different. Since both \sty{jurabib} and \biblatex are full"=featured packages, the list of similarities and differences is too long to be discussed here.
 
 \item[mcite]
-The \sty{mcite} package provides support for grouped citations, \ie multiple items can be cited as a single reference and listed as a single block in the bibliography. The citation groups are defined as the items are cited. This only works with unsorted bibliographies. The \sty{biblatex} package also supports grouped citations, which are called <entry sets> or <reference sets> in this manual. See \secref{use:use:set,use:bib:set,use:cit:mct} for details.
+The \sty{mcite} package provides support for grouped citations, \ie multiple items can be cited as a single reference and listed as a single block in the bibliography. The citation groups are defined as the items are cited. This only works with unsorted bibliographies. The \biblatex package also supports grouped citations, which are called <entry sets> or <reference sets> in this manual. See \secref{use:use:set,use:bib:set,use:cit:mct} for details.
 
 \item[mciteplus]
 A significantly enhanced reimplementation of the \sty{mcite} package which supports grouping in sorted bibliographies. See \sty{mcite}.
@@ -313,7 +315,7 @@ The \sty{natbib} package supports numeric and author"=year citation schemes, inc
 The \sty{splitbib} package provides support for bibliographies subdivided by topic. See \sty{bibtopic}.
 
 \item[titlesec]
-The \sty{titlesec} package redefines user-level document division commands such as \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section}. This approach is not compatible with internal command changes applied by the \sty{biblatex} \texttt{refsection} and \texttt{refsegment} option settings described in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
+The \sty{titlesec} package redefines user-level document division commands such as \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section}. This approach is not compatible with internal command changes applied by the \biblatex \texttt{refsection} and \texttt{refsegment} option settings described in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \item[ucs]
 The \sty{ucs} package provides support for \utf encoded input. Either use \sty{inputenc}'s standard \file{utf8} module or a Unicode enabled engine such as \xetex or \luatex instead.
@@ -336,6 +338,7 @@ compatibility matrix for the recent versions.
 \sffamily\bfseries\spotcolor Biber version
   & \sffamily\bfseries\spotcolor \biblatex\ version\\
 \midrule
+1.9 & 2.9\\
 1.8 & 2.8\\
 1.7 & 2.7\\
 1.6 & 2.6\\
@@ -364,19 +367,19 @@ compatibility matrix for the recent versions.
 \section{Database Guide}
 \label{bib}
 
-It is important to distinguish between \bibtex the program and \bibtex the file format. \sty{biblatex} can be used with or without \bibtex the program since its default backend \biber uses fully supports the \bibtex file format (\file{bib}) and users should be able to move to \sty{biblatex} will little or no changes to their \bibtex data files when using \biber as a backend. If using \bibtex as the data backend, note that you cannot use arbitrary \file{bst} files because the package depends on a special \bibtex interface. When using \bibtex as a backend, \sty{biblatex} uses its own special \file{bst} file only. The entry guide below is backend agnostic unless otherwise stated.
+It is important to distinguish between \bibtex the program and \bibtex the file format. \biblatex can be used with or without \bibtex the program since its default backend \biber uses fully supports the \bibtex file format (\file{bib}) and users should be able to move to \biblatex will little or no changes to their \bibtex data files when using \biber as a backend. If using \bibtex as the data backend, note that you cannot use arbitrary \file{bst} files because the package depends on a special \bibtex interface. When using \bibtex as a backend, \biblatex uses its own special \file{bst} file only. The entry guide below is backend agnostic unless otherwise stated.
 
-This section describes the default data model defined in the \file{blx-dm.def} file which is part of \path{biblatex}. The data model is defined using the macros documented in \secref{aut:ctm:dm}. It is possible to redefine the data model which both \sty{biblatex} and \biber use so that datasources can contain new entrytypes and fields (which of course will need style support). The data model specification also allows for constraints to be defined so that data sources can be validated against the data model (using \biber's \path{--validate_datamodel} option). Users who want to customise the data model need to look at the \file{blx-dm.def} file and to read \secref{aut:ctm:dm}.
+This section describes the default data model defined in the \file{blx-dm.def} file which is part of \path{biblatex}. The data model is defined using the macros documented in \secref{aut:ctm:dm}. It is possible to redefine the data model which both \biblatex and \biber use so that datasources can contain new entrytypes and fields (which of course will need style support). The data model specification also allows for constraints to be defined so that data sources can be validated against the data model (using \biber's \path{--validate_datamodel} option). Users who want to customise the data model need to look at the \file{blx-dm.def} file and to read \secref{aut:ctm:dm}.
 
 \subsection{Entry Types}
 \label{bib:typ}
 
-This section gives an overview of the entry types supported by the default \sty{biblatex} data model along with the fields supported by each type.
+This section gives an overview of the entry types supported by the default \biblatex data model along with the fields supported by each type.
 
 \subsubsection{Regular Types}
 \label{bib:typ:blx}
 
-The lists below indicate the fields supported by each entry type. Note that the mapping of fields to an entry type is ultimately at the discretion of the bibliography style. The lists below therefore serve two purposes. They indicate the fields supported by the standard styles which ship with this package and they also serve as a model for custom styles. Note that the <required> fields are not strictly required in all cases, see \secref{bib:use:key} for details. The fields marked as <optional> are optional in a technical sense. Bibliographical formatting rules usually require more than just the <required> fields. The default data model defined a few constraints for the format of date fields, ISBNs and some special fields like \bibfield{gender} but the constraints are only used if validating against the data model with \biber's \path{--validate_datamodel} option. Generic fields like \bibfield{abstract} and \bibfield{annotation} or \bibfield{label} and \bibfield{shorthand} are not included in the lists below because they are independent of the entry type. The special fields discussed in \secref{bib:fld:spc}, which are also independent of the entry type, are not included in the lists either. See the default data model specification in the file \file{blx-dm.def} which comes with \sty{biblatex} for a complete specification.
+The lists below indicate the fields supported by each entry type. Note that the mapping of fields to an entry type is ultimately at the discretion of the bibliography style. The lists below therefore serve two purposes. They indicate the fields supported by the standard styles which ship with this package and they also serve as a model for custom styles. Note that the <required> fields are not strictly required in all cases, see \secref{bib:use:key} for details. The fields marked as <optional> are optional in a technical sense. Bibliographical formatting rules usually require more than just the <required> fields. The default data model defined a few constraints for the format of date fields, ISBNs and some special fields like \bibfield{gender} but the constraints are only used if validating against the data model with \biber's \path{--validate_datamodel} option. Generic fields like \bibfield{abstract} and \bibfield{annotation} or \bibfield{label} and \bibfield{shorthand} are not included in the lists below because they are independent of the entry type. The special fields discussed in \secref{bib:fld:spc}, which are also independent of the entry type, are not included in the lists either. See the default data model specification in the file \file{blx-dm.def} which comes with \biblatex for a complete specification.
 
 \begin{typelist}
 
@@ -441,8 +444,8 @@ A multi"=volume \bibtype{collection}. For backwards compatibility, multi"=volume
 
 A contribution to a collection which forms a self"=contained unit with a distinct author and title. The \bibfield{author} refers to the \bibfield{title}, the \bibfield{editor} to the \bibfield{booktitle}, \ie the title of the collection.
 
-\reqitem{author, editor, title, booktitle, year/date}
-\optitem{editora, editorb, editorc, translator, annotator, commentator, introduction, foreword, afterword, subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, booksubtitle, booktitleaddon, language, origlanguage, volume, part, edition, volumes, series, number, note, publisher, location, isbn, chapter, pages, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
+\reqitem{author, title, booktitle, year/date}
+\optitem{editor, editora, editorb, editorc, translator, annotator, commentator, introduction, foreword, afterword, subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, booksubtitle, booktitleaddon, language, origlanguage, volume, part, edition, volumes, series, number, note, publisher, location, isbn, chapter, pages, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
 
 \typeitem{suppcollection}
 
@@ -491,22 +494,22 @@ Supplemental material in a \bibtype{periodical}. This type is similar to \bibtyp
 
 A single"=volume conference proceedings. This type is very similar to \bibtype{collection}. It supports an optional \bibfield{organization} field which holds the sponsoring institution. The \bibfield{editor} is omissible in terms of \secref{bib:use:key}.
 
-\reqitem{editor, title, year/date}
-\optitem{subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volume, part, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, chapter, pages, pagetotal, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
+\reqitem{title, year/date}
+\optitem{editor, subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volume, part, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, chapter, pages, pagetotal, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
 
 \typeitem{mvproceedings}
 
 A multi"=volume \bibtype{proceedings} entry. For backwards compatibility, multi"=volume proceedings are also supported by the entry type \bibtype{proceedings}. However, it is advisable to make use of the dedicated entry type \bibtype{mvproceedings}
 
-\reqitem{editor, title, year/date}
-\optitem{subtitle, titleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, pagetotal, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
+\reqitem{title, year/date}
+\optitem{editor, subtitle, titleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, pagetotal, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
 
 \typeitem{inproceedings}
 
 An article in a conference proceedings. This type is similar to \bibtype{incollection}. It supports an optional \bibfield{organization} field.
 
-\reqitem{author, editor, title, booktitle, year/date}
-\optitem{subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, booksubtitle, booktitleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volume, part, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, chapter, pages, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
+\reqitem{author, title, booktitle, year/date}
+\optitem{editor, subtitle, titleaddon, maintitle, mainsubtitle, maintitleaddon, booksubtitle, booktitleaddon, eventtitle, eventtitleaddon, eventdate, venue, language, volume, part, volumes, series, number, note, organization, publisher, location, month, isbn, chapter, pages, addendum, pubstate, doi, eprint, eprintclass, eprinttype, url, urldate}
 
 \typeitem{reference}
 
@@ -654,12 +657,12 @@ Audiovisual recordings, typically on \acr{DVD}, \acr{VHS} cassette, or similar m
 \subsection{Entry Fields}
 \label{bib:fld}
 
-This section gives an overview of the fields supported by the \sty{biblatex} default data model. See \secref{bib:fld:typ} for an introduction to the data types used by the data model specification and \secref{bib:fld:dat, bib:fld:spc} for the actual field listings.
+This section gives an overview of the fields supported by the \biblatex default data model. See \secref{bib:fld:typ} for an introduction to the data types used by the data model specification and \secref{bib:fld:dat, bib:fld:spc} for the actual field listings.
 
 \subsubsection{Data Types}
 \label{bib:fld:typ}
 
-In datasources such as a \file{bib} file, all bibliographic data is specified in fields. Some of those fields, for example \bibfield{author} and \bibfield{editor}, may contain a list of items. This list structure is implemented by the \bibtex file format via the keyword <|and|>, which is used to separate the individual items in the list. The \sty{biblatex} package implements three distinct data types to handle bibliographic data: name lists, literal lists, and fields. There are also several list and field subtypes and a content type which can be used to semantically distinguish fields which are otherwise not distinguishable on the basis of only their datatype (see \secref{aut:ctm:dm}). This section gives an overview of the data types supported by this package. See \secref{bib:fld:dat, bib:fld:spc} for information about the mapping of the \bibtex file format fields to \sty{biblatex}'s data types.
+In datasources such as a \file{bib} file, all bibliographic data is specified in fields. Some of those fields, for example \bibfield{author} and \bibfield{editor}, may contain a list of items. This list structure is implemented by the \bibtex file format via the keyword <|and|>, which is used to separate the individual items in the list. The \biblatex package implements three distinct data types to handle bibliographic data: name lists, literal lists, and fields. There are also several list and field subtypes and a content type which can be used to semantically distinguish fields which are otherwise not distinguishable on the basis of only their datatype (see \secref{aut:ctm:dm}). This section gives an overview of the data types supported by this package. See \secref{bib:fld:dat, bib:fld:spc} for information about the mapping of the \bibtex file format fields to \biblatex's data types.
 
 \begin{description}
 
@@ -684,7 +687,7 @@ In datasources such as a \file{bib} file, all bibliographic data is specified in
 
 \item[Literal fields] are printed as is. Typical examples of literal fields are \bibfield{title} and \bibfield{note}.
 
-\item[Range fields] are literal fields with one special feature: all dashes are normalized and replaced by the command \cmd{bibrangedash}. Any number of consecutive dashes will only yield a single range dash. A typical example of a range field is the \bibfield{pages} field. See also the \BiberOnlyMark\cmd{bibrangessep} command which can be used to customise the separator between multiple ranges.
+\item[Range fields] consist of one or more ranges where all dashes are normalized and replaced by the command \cmd{bibrangedash}. A range is something optionally followed by one or more dashes optionally followed by some non-dash (e.g. \texttt{5--7}). Any number of consecutive dashes will only yield a single range dash. A typical example of a range field is the \bibfield{pages} field. See also the \BiberOnlyMark\cmd{bibrangessep} command which can be used to customise the separator between multiple ranges. With \biber, range fields will be skipped and will generate a warning if they do not consist of one or more ranges. You can normalise messy range fields before they are parsed using \cmd{DeclareSourcemap} (see \secref{aut:ctm:map}).
 
 \item[Integer fields] hold unformatted integers which may be converted to ordinals or strings as they are printed. A typical example is the \bibfield{extrayear} field.
 
@@ -692,11 +695,11 @@ In datasources such as a \file{bib} file, all bibliographic data is specified in
 
 \item[Date fields] hold a date specification in \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd} format or a date range in \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd/yyyy-mm-dd} format. Date fields are special in that the date is parsed and split up into its components. See \secref{bib:use:dat} for details. A typical example is the \bibfield{date} field.
 
-\item[Verbatim fields] are processed in verbatim mode and may contain special characters. Typical examples of verbatim fields are \bibfield{file and }\bibfield{doi}.
+\item[Verbatim fields] are processed in verbatim mode and may contain special characters. Typical examples of verbatim fields are \bibfield{file} and \bibfield{doi}.
 
 \item[URI fields] are processed in verbatim mode and may contain special characters. They are also URL-escaped if they don't look like they already are. The typical example of a uri field is \bibfield{url}.
 
-\item[Comma"=separated value fields] A comma"=separated list of literal values. Examples are the \bibfield{keywords} and \bibfield{options} fields.
+\item[Separated value fields] A separated list of literal values. Examples are the \bibfield{keywords} and \bibfield{options} fields. The separator is always a comma when using \bibtex as the backend but can be configured to be any Perl regular expression when using \biber via the \opt{xsvsep} option which defaults to the usual \bibtex comma surrounded by optional whitespace.
 
 \item[Pattern fields] A literal field which must match a particular pattern. An example is the \bibfield{gender} field from \secref{bib:fld:spc}.
 
@@ -710,7 +713,9 @@ In datasources such as a \file{bib} file, all bibliographic data is specified in
 \subsubsection{Data Fields}
 \label{bib:fld:dat}
 
-The fields listed in this section are the regular ones holding printable data in the default data model. The name on the left is the default data model name of the field as used by \sty{biblatex} and its backend. The \sty{biblatex} data type is given to the right of the name. See \secref{bib:fld:typ} for explanation of the various data types.
+The fields listed in this section are the regular ones holding printable data in the default data model. The name on the left is the default data model name of the field as used by \biblatex and its backend. The \biblatex data type is given to the right of the name. See \secref{bib:fld:typ} for explanation of the various data types.
+
+\BiberOnlyMark Some fields are marked as <Label fields> which means that they are often used as abbreviation labels when printing bibliography lists in the sense of section \secref{use:bib:biblist}. \biblatex automatically creates supporting macros for such fields. See \secref{use:bib:biblist}.
 
 \begin{fieldlist}
 
@@ -864,7 +869,7 @@ A publication notice for unusual publications which do not fit into any of the c
 
 \fielditem{indextitle}{literal}
 
-A title to use for indexing instead of the regular \bibfield{title} field. This field may be useful if you have an entry with a title like «An Introduction to \dots» and want that indexed as «Introduction to \dots, An». Style authors should note that \sty{biblatex} automatically copies the value of the \bibfield{title} field to \bibfield{indextitle} if the latter field is undefined.
+A title to use for indexing instead of the regular \bibfield{title} field. This field may be useful if you have an entry with a title like «An Introduction to \dots» and want that indexed as «Introduction to \dots, An». Style authors should note that \biblatex automatically copies the value of the \bibfield{title} field to \bibfield{indextitle} if the latter field is undefined.
 
 \listitem{institution}{literal}
 
@@ -1018,31 +1023,31 @@ The publication state of the work, \eg\ <in press>. See \secref{aut:lng:key:pst}
 
 The name of a publication series, such as «Studies in \dots», or the number of a journal series. Books in a publication series are usually numbered. The number or volume of a book in a series is given in the \bibfield{number} field. Note that the \bibtype{article} entry type makes use of the \bibfield{series} field as well, but handles it in a special way. See \secref{bib:use:ser} for details.
 
-\listitem{shortauthor}{name}
+\listitem{shortauthor}{name\LFMark}
 
 The author(s) of the work, given in an abbreviated form. This field is mainly intended for abbreviated forms of corporate authors, see \secref{bib:use:inc} for details.
 
-\listitem{shorteditor}{name}
+\listitem{shorteditor}{name\LFMark}
 
 The editor(s) of the work, given in an abbreviated form. This field is mainly intended for abbreviated forms of corporate editors, see \secref{bib:use:inc} for details.
 
-\fielditem{shorthand}{literal}
+\fielditem{shorthand}{literal\LFMark}
 
-A special designation to be used by the citation style instead of the usual label. This field is intended for citation aliasing. If defined, it overrides the default label. If any of the cited bibliography entries includes a \bibfield{shorthand} field, \sty{biblatex} automatically builds a list of shorthands which may be printed in addition to the regular bibliography; see \secref{use:bib:los} for details. See also \bibfield{label}.
+A special designation to be used by the citation style instead of the usual label. If defined, it overrides the default label. See also \bibfield{label}.
 
 \fielditem{shorthandintro}{literal}
 
 The verbose citation styles which comes with this package use a phrase like «henceforth cited as [shorthand]» to introduce shorthands on the first citation. If the \bibfield{shorthandintro} field is defined, it overrides the standard phrase. Note that the alternative phrase must include the shorthand.
 
-\fielditem{shortjournal}{literal}
+\fielditem{shortjournal}{literal\LFMark}
 
 A short version or an acronym of the \bibfield{journaltitle}. Not used by the standard bibliography styles.
 
-\fielditem{shortseries}{literal}
+\fielditem{shortseries}{literal\LFMark}
 
 A short version or an acronym of the \bibfield{series} field. Not used by the standard bibliography styles.
 
-\fielditem{shorttitle}{literal}
+\fielditem{shorttitle}{literal\LFMark}
 
 The title in an abridged form. This field is usually not included in the bibliography. It is intended for citations in author"=title format. If present, the author"=title citation styles use this field instead of \bibfield{title}.
 
@@ -1105,9 +1110,9 @@ The fields listed in this section do not hold printable data but serve a differe
 
 \fielditem{crossref}{entry key}
 
-This field holds an entry key for the cross"=referencing feature. Child entries with a \bibfield{crossref} field inherit data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{crossref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. The threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, the child entries still inherit the data from the parent entry but their \bibfield{crossref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also the \bibfield{xref} field in this section as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref}.
+This field holds an entry key for the cross"=referencing feature. Child entries with a \bibfield{crossref} field inherit data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{crossref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. The threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \biblatex level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{crossref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, the child entries still inherit the data from the parent entry but their \bibfield{crossref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also the \bibfield{xref} field in this section as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref}.
 
-\fielditem{entryset}{comma"=separated values}
+\fielditem{entryset}{separated values}
 
 This field is specific to entry sets. See \secref{use:use:set} for details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
@@ -1150,6 +1155,7 @@ Polish       & Poland         & \opt{polish} \\
 Portuguese   & Brazil         & \opt{brazil} \\
              & Portugal       & \opt{portuguese}, \opt{portuges} \\
 Russian      & Russia         & \opt{russian} \\
+Slovene      & Slovenian      & \opt{slovene} \\
 Spanish      & Spain          & \opt{spanish} \\
 Swedish      & Sweden         & \opt{swedish} \\
 \bottomrule
@@ -1160,11 +1166,11 @@ Swedish      & Sweden         & \opt{swedish} \\
 
 \fielditem{langid}{identifier}
 
-The language id of the bibliography entry. The alias \bibfield{hyphenation} is provided for backwards compatibility. The identifier must be a language name known to the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} packages. This information may be used to switch hyphenation patterns and localize strings in the bibliography. Note that the language names are case sensitive. The languages currently supported by this package are given in \tabref{bib:fld:tab1}. Note that \sty{babel} treats the identifier \opt{english} as an alias for \opt{british} or \opt{american}, depending on the \sty{babel} version. The \sty{biblatex} package always treats it as an alias for \opt{american}. It is preferable to use the language identifiers \opt{american} and \opt{british} (\sty{babel}) or a language specific option to specify a language variant (\sty{polyglossia}, using the \bibfield{langidopts} field) to avoid any possible confusion. Compare \bibfield{language} in \secref{bib:fld:dat}.
+The language id of the bibliography entry. The alias \bibfield{hyphenation} is provided for backwards compatibility. The identifier must be a language name known to the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} packages. This information may be used to switch hyphenation patterns and localize strings in the bibliography. Note that the language names are case sensitive. The languages currently supported by this package are given in \tabref{bib:fld:tab1}. Note that \sty{babel} treats the identifier \opt{english} as an alias for \opt{british} or \opt{american}, depending on the \sty{babel} version. The \biblatex package always treats it as an alias for \opt{american}. It is preferable to use the language identifiers \opt{american} and \opt{british} (\sty{babel}) or a language specific option to specify a language variant (\sty{polyglossia}, using the \bibfield{langidopts} field) to avoid any possible confusion. Compare \bibfield{language} in \secref{bib:fld:dat}.
 
-\fielditem{langidopts}{comma"=separated \keyval options}
+\fielditem{langidopts}{literal}
 
-For \sty{polyglossia} users, allows per-entry language specific options. These are passed to \sty{polyglossia}'s language switching facility when using the package option \opt{autolang=langname}. For example, the fields:
+For \sty{polyglossia} users, allows per-entry language specific options. The literal value of this field is passed to \sty{polyglossia}'s language switching facility when using the package option \opt{autolang=langname}. For example, the fields:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 langid         = {english},
@@ -1180,9 +1186,9 @@ would wrap the bibliography entry in:
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
 
-\fielditem{ids}{comma"=separated list of entrykeys\BiberOnlyMark}
+\fielditem{ids}{separated list of entrykeys\BiberOnlyMark}
 
-Citation key aliases for the main citation key. An entry may be cited by any of its aliases and \sty{biblatex} will treat the citation as if it had used the primary citation key. This is to aid users who change their citation keys but have legacy documents which use older keys for the same entry. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
+Citation key aliases for the main citation key. An entry may be cited by any of its aliases and \biblatex will treat the citation as if it had used the primary citation key. This is to aid users who change their citation keys but have legacy documents which use older keys for the same entry. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
 \fielditem{indexsorttitle}{literal}
 
@@ -1194,25 +1200,25 @@ indextitle     = {\LaTeX\ Companion, The},
 indexsorttitle = {LATEX Companion},
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Style authors should note that \sty{biblatex} automatically copies the value of either the \bibfield{indextitle} or the \bibfield{title} field to \bibfield{indexsorttitle} if the latter field is undefined.
+Style authors should note that \biblatex automatically copies the value of either the \bibfield{indextitle} or the \bibfield{title} field to \bibfield{indexsorttitle} if the latter field is undefined.
 
-\fielditem{keywords}{comma"=separated values}
+\fielditem{keywords}{separated values}
 
-A comma"=separated list of keywords. These keywords are intended for the bibliography filters (see \secref{use:bib:bib, use:use:div}), they are usually not printed. Note that spaces after commas are ignored.
+A separated list of keywords. These keywords are intended for the bibliography filters (see \secref{use:bib:bib, use:use:div}), they are usually not printed. Note that with the default separator (comma), spaces around the separator are ignored.
 
-\fielditem{options}{comma"=separated \keyval options}
+\fielditem{options}{separated \keyval options}
 
-A comma"=separated list of entry options in \keyval notation. This field is used to set options on a per"=entry basis. See \secref{use:opt:bib} for details. Note that citation and bibliography styles may define additional entry options.
+A separated list of entry options in \keyval notation. This field is used to set options on a per"=entry basis. See \secref{use:opt:bib} for details. Note that citation and bibliography styles may define additional entry options.
 
 \fielditem{presort}{string}
 
 A special field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. This field is the first item the sorting routine considers when sorting the bibliography, hence it may be used to arrange the entries in groups. This may be useful when creating subdivided bibliographies with the bibliography filters. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details. Also see \secref{aut:ctm:srt}. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
-\fielditem{related}{comma"=separated values\BiberOnlyMark}
+\fielditem{related}{separated values\BiberOnlyMark}
 
 Citation keys of other entries which have a relationship to this entry. The relationship is specified by the \bibfield{relatedtype} field. Please refer to \secref{use:rel} for further details.
 
-\fielditem{relatedoptions}{comma"=separated values\BiberOnlyMark}
+\fielditem{relatedoptions}{separated values\BiberOnlyMark}
 
 Per"=type options to set for a related entry. Note that this does not set the options on the related entry itself, only the \opt{dataonly} clone which is used as a datasource for the parent entry.
 
@@ -1228,7 +1234,7 @@ A field used to override the bibliography string specified by \bibfield{relatedt
 
 \fielditem{sortkey}{literal}
 
-A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. Think of this field as the master sort key. If present, \sty{biblatex} uses this field during sorting and ignores everything else, except for the \bibfield{presort} field. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
+A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. Think of this field as the master sort key. If present, \biblatex uses this field during sorting and ignores everything else, except for the \bibfield{presort} field. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
 \listitem{sortname}{name}
 
@@ -1236,7 +1242,7 @@ A name or a list of names used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography.
 
 \fielditem{sortshorthand}{literal\BiberOnlyMark}
 
-Similar to \bibfield{sortkey} but used in the list of shorthands. If present, \sty{biblatex} uses this field instead of \bibfield{shorthand} when sorting the list of shorthands. This is useful if the \bibfield{shorthand} field holds shorthands with formatting commands such as \cmd{emph} or \cmd{textbf}. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
+Similar to \bibfield{sortkey} but used in the list of shorthands. If present, \biblatex uses this field instead of \bibfield{shorthand} when sorting the list of shorthands. This is useful if the \bibfield{shorthand} field holds shorthands with formatting commands such as \cmd{emph} or \cmd{textbf}. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
 \fielditem{sorttitle}{literal}
 
@@ -1246,13 +1252,13 @@ A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this f
 
 A field used to modify the sorting order of the bibliography. If present, this field is used instead of the \bibfield{year} field when sorting the bibliography. Please refer to \secref{use:srt} for further details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
-\fielditem{xdata}{comma"=separated list of entrykeys\BiberOnlyMark}
+\fielditem{xdata}{separated list of entrykeys\BiberOnlyMark}
 
-This field inherits data from one or more \bibtype{xdata} entries. Conceptually, the \bibfield{xdata} field is related to \bibfield{crossref} and \bibfield{xref}: \bibfield{crossref} establishes a logical parent/child relation and inherits data; \bibfield{xref} establishes as logical parent/child relation without inheriting data; \bibfield{xdata} inherits data without establishing a relation. The value of the \bibfield{xdata} may be a single entry key or a comma"=separated list of keys. See \secref{use:use:xdat} for further details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
+This field inherits data from one or more \bibtype{xdata} entries. Conceptually, the \bibfield{xdata} field is related to \bibfield{crossref} and \bibfield{xref}: \bibfield{crossref} establishes a logical parent/child relation and inherits data; \bibfield{xref} establishes as logical parent/child relation without inheriting data; \bibfield{xdata} inherits data without establishing a relation. The value of the \bibfield{xdata} may be a single entry key or a separated list of keys. See \secref{use:use:xdat} for further details. This field is consumed by the backend processing and does not appear in the \path{.bbl}.
 
 \fielditem{xref}{entry key}
 
-This field is an alternative cross"=referencing mechanism. It differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. The threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \sty{biblatex} level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also the \bibfield{crossref} field in this section as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref}.
+This field is an alternative cross"=referencing mechanism. It differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent entry specified in the \bibfield{xref} field. If the number of child entries referencing a specific parent entry hits a certain threshold, the parent entry is automatically added to the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. The threshold is settable with the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Style authors should note that whether or not the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries are defined on the \biblatex level depends on the availability of the parent entry. If the parent entry is available, the \bibfield{xref} fields of the child entries will be defined. If not, their \bibfield{xref} fields will be undefined. Whether the parent entry is added to the bibliography implicitly because of the threshold or explicitly because it has been cited does not matter. See also the \bibfield{crossref} field in this section as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref}.
 
 \end{fieldlist}
 
@@ -1294,7 +1300,7 @@ The aliases listed in this section are provided for backwards compatibility with
 
 \listitem{address}{literal}
 
-An alias for \bibfield{location}, provided for \bibtex compatibility. Traditional \bibtex uses the slightly misleading field name \bibfield{address} for the place of publication, \ie the location of the publisher, while \sty{biblatex} uses the generic field name \bibfield{location}. See \secref{bib:fld:dat,bib:use:and}.
+An alias for \bibfield{location}, provided for \bibtex compatibility. Traditional \bibtex uses the slightly misleading field name \bibfield{address} for the place of publication, \ie the location of the publisher, while \biblatex uses the generic field name \bibfield{location}. See \secref{bib:fld:dat,bib:use:and}.
 
 \fielditem{annote}{literal}
 
@@ -1322,7 +1328,7 @@ An alias for \bibfield{eprintclass}, provided for arXiv compatibility. See \secr
 
 \listitem{school}{literal}
 
-An alias for \bibfield{institution}, provided for \bibtex compatibility. The \bibfield{institution} field is used by traditional \bibtex for technical reports whereas the \bibfield{school} field holds the institution associated with theses. The \sty{biblatex} package employs the generic field name \bibfield{institution} in both cases. See \secref{bib:fld:dat,bib:use:and}.
+An alias for \bibfield{institution}, provided for \bibtex compatibility. The \bibfield{institution} field is used by traditional \bibtex for technical reports whereas the \bibfield{school} field holds the institution associated with theses. The \biblatex package employs the generic field name \bibfield{institution} in both cases. See \secref{bib:fld:dat,bib:use:and}.
 
 \end{fieldlist}
 
@@ -1330,7 +1336,7 @@ An alias for \bibfield{institution}, provided for \bibtex compatibility. The \bi
 \label{bib:use}
 
 The entry types and fields supported by this package should for the most part be intuitive to use for anyone familiar with \bibtex. However, apart from the additional types and fields provided by this package, some of the familiar ones are handled in a way which is in need of explanation.
-This package includes some compatibility code for \file{bib} files which were generated with a traditional \bibtex style in mind. Unfortunately, it is not possible to handle all legacy files automatically because \sty{biblatex}'s data model is slightly different from traditional \bibtex. Therefore, such \file{bib} files will most likely require editing in order to work properly with this package. In sum, the following items are different from traditional \bibtex styles:
+This package includes some compatibility code for \file{bib} files which were generated with a traditional \bibtex style in mind. Unfortunately, it is not possible to handle all legacy files automatically because \biblatex's data model is slightly different from traditional \bibtex. Therefore, such \file{bib} files will most likely require editing in order to work properly with this package. In sum, the following items are different from traditional \bibtex styles:
 
 \begin{itemize}
 \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}
@@ -1343,7 +1349,7 @@ This package includes some compatibility code for \file{bib} files which were ge
 \item The field \bibfield{key}. See \secref{bib:use:key} for details.
 \end{itemize}
 
-Users of the \sty{jurabib} package should note that the \bibfield{shortauthor} field is treated as a name list by \sty{biblatex}, see \secref{bib:use:inc} for details.
+Users of the \sty{jurabib} package should note that the \bibfield{shortauthor} field is treated as a name list by \biblatex, see \secref{bib:use:inc} for details.
 
 \subsubsection{The Entry Type \bibtype{inbook}}
 \label{bib:use:inb}
@@ -1357,7 +1363,7 @@ The fields marked as <required> in \secref{bib:typ:blx} are not strictly require
 
 You may generally use the \bibfield{label} field to provide a substitute for any missing data required for citations. How the \bibfield{label} field is employed depends on the citation style. The author"=year citation styles which come with this package use the \bibfield{label} field as a fallback if either the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} or the \bibfield{year} is missing. The numeric styles, on the other hand, do not use it at all since the numeric scheme is independent of the available data. The author"=title styles ignore it as well, because the bare \bibfield{title} is usually sufficient to form a unique citation and a title is expected to be available in any case. The \bibfield{label} field may also be used to override the non"=numeric portion of the automatically generated \bibfield{labelalpha} field used by alphabetic citation styles. See \secref{aut:bbx:fld} for details.
 
-Note that traditional \bibtex styles support a \bibfield{key} field which is used for alphabetizing if both \bibfield{author} and \bibfield{editor} are missing. The \sty{biblatex} package treats \bibfield{key} as an alias for \bibfield{sortkey}. In addition to that, it offers very fine-grained sorting controls, see \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:srt} for details. The \sty{natbib} package employs the \bibfield{key} field as a fallback label for citations. Use the \bibfield{label} field instead.
+Note that traditional \bibtex styles support a \bibfield{key} field which is used for alphabetizing if both \bibfield{author} and \bibfield{editor} are missing. The \biblatex package treats \bibfield{key} as an alias for \bibfield{sortkey}. In addition to that, it offers very fine-grained sorting controls, see \secref{bib:fld:spc, use:srt} for details. The \sty{natbib} package employs the \bibfield{key} field as a fallback label for citations. Use the \bibfield{label} field instead.
 
 \subsubsection{Corporate Authors and Editors}
 \label{bib:use:inc}
@@ -1377,7 +1383,7 @@ editor       = {<<{National Aeronautics and Space Administration}>>
 shorteditor  = {NASA and Doe, John},
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Users switching from the \sty{jurabib} package to \sty{biblatex} should note that the \bibfield{shortauthor} field is treated as a name list.
+Users switching from the \sty{jurabib} package to \biblatex should note that the \bibfield{shortauthor} field is treated as a name list.
 
 \subsubsection{Literal Lists}
 \label{bib:use:and}
@@ -1402,7 +1408,7 @@ organization = {<<{American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing}>>
 		<<{American Congress on Surveying and Mapping}>>},
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Legacy files which have not been updated for use with \sty{biblatex} will still work if these fields do not contain a literal <and>. However, note that you will miss out on the additional features of literal lists in this case, such as configurable formatting and automatic truncation.
+Legacy files which have not been updated for use with \biblatex will still work if these fields do not contain a literal <and>. However, note that you will miss out on the additional features of literal lists in this case, such as configurable formatting and automatic truncation.
 
 \subsubsection{Titles}
 \label{bib:use:ttl}
@@ -1596,7 +1602,7 @@ This entry will be printed as «\emph{Journal Name}. New ser. 9 (1998)». See \s
 \label{bib:use:tab1}
 \end{table}
 
-The date fields \bibfield{date}, \bibfield{origdate}, \bibfield{eventdate}, and \bibfield{urldate} require a date specification in \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd} format. Date ranges are given as \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd\slash yyyy-mm-dd}. Partial dates are valid provided that date components are omitted at the end only. You may specify an open ended date range by giving the range separator and omitting the end date (\eg \texttt{yyyy/}). See \tabref{bib:use:tab1} for some examples of valid date specifications and the formatted date automatically generated by \sty{biblatex}. The formatted date is language specific and will be adapted automatically. If there is no \bibfield{date} field in an entry, \sty{biblatex} will also consider the fields \bibfield{year} and \bibfield{month} for backwards compatibility with traditional \bibtex. Style author should note that date fields like \bibfield{date} or \bibfield{origdate} are only available in the \file{bib} file. All dates are parsed and dissected into their components as the \file{bib} file is processed. The date components are made available to styles by way of the special fields discussed in \secref{aut:bbx:fld:dat}. See this section and \tabref{aut:bbx:fld:tab1} on page~\pageref{aut:bbx:fld:tab1} for further information.
+The date fields \bibfield{date}, \bibfield{origdate}, \bibfield{eventdate}, and \bibfield{urldate} require a date specification in \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd} format. Date ranges are given as \texttt{yyyy-mm-dd\slash yyyy-mm-dd}. Partial dates are valid provided that date components are omitted at the end only. You may specify an open ended date range by giving the range separator and omitting the end date (\eg \texttt{yyyy/}). See \tabref{bib:use:tab1} for some examples of valid date specifications and the formatted date automatically generated by \biblatex. The formatted date is language specific and will be adapted automatically. If there is no \bibfield{date} field in an entry, \biblatex will also consider the fields \bibfield{year} and \bibfield{month} for backwards compatibility with traditional \bibtex. Style author should note that date fields like \bibfield{date} or \bibfield{origdate} are only available in the \file{bib} file. All dates are parsed and dissected into their components as the \file{bib} file is processed. The date components are made available to styles by way of the special fields discussed in \secref{aut:bbx:fld:dat}. See this section and \tabref{aut:bbx:fld:tab1} on page~\pageref{aut:bbx:fld:tab1} for further information.
 
 \subsubsection{Months and Journal Issues}
 \label{bib:use:iss}
@@ -1606,7 +1612,7 @@ The \bibfield{month} field is an integer field. The bibliography style converts
 \subsubsection{Pagination}
 \label{bib:use:pag}
 
-When specifying a page or page range, either in the \bibfield{pages} field of an entry or in the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command, it is convenient to have \sty{biblatex} add prefixes like <p.> or <pp.> automatically and this is indeed what this package does by default. However, some works may use a different pagination scheme or may not be cited by page but rather by verse or line number. This is when the \bibfield{pagination} and \bibfield{bookpagination} fields come into play. As an example, consider the following entry:
+When specifying a page or page range, either in the \bibfield{pages} field of an entry or in the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command, it is convenient to have \biblatex add prefixes like <p.> or <pp.> automatically and this is indeed what this package does by default. However, some works may use a different pagination scheme or may not be cited by page but rather by verse or line number. This is when the \bibfield{pagination} and \bibfield{bookpagination} fields come into play. As an example, consider the following entry:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 @InBook{key,
@@ -1697,7 +1703,7 @@ See \apxref{apx:ref} for a list of mapping rules set up by default. Note that al
 \paragraph{The \bibfield{xref} field}
 \label{bib:cav:ref:ref}
 
-In addition to the \bibfield{crossref} field, \sty{biblatex} supports a simplified cross"=referencing mechanism based on the \bibfield{xref} field. This is useful if you want to establish a parent\slash child relation between two associated entries but prefer to keep them independent as far as the data is concerned. The \bibfield{xref} field differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent. If the parent is referenced by a certain number of child entries, \sty{biblatex} will automatically add it to the bibliography. The threshold is controlled by the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The \bibfield{xref} field is supported with all backends. See also \secref{bib:fld:spc}.
+In addition to the \bibfield{crossref} field, \biblatex supports a simplified cross"=referencing mechanism based on the \bibfield{xref} field. This is useful if you want to establish a parent\slash child relation between two associated entries but prefer to keep them independent as far as the data is concerned. The \bibfield{xref} field differs from \bibfield{crossref} in that the child entry will not inherit any data from the parent. If the parent is referenced by a certain number of child entries, \biblatex will automatically add it to the bibliography. The threshold is controlled by the \opt{mincrossrefs} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The \bibfield{xref} field is supported with all backends. See also \secref{bib:fld:spc}.
 
 \subsubsection{Capacity Issues}
 \label{bib:cav:btx}
@@ -1783,7 +1789,7 @@ Apart from it being inconvenient, there are two major issues with this conventio
 
 \paragraph{\file{bibtex8}}
 \label{bib:cav:enc:bt8}
-Switching to \file{bibtex8} will help in such cases. \file{bibtex8} can sort case"=sensitively and it can handle 8-bit characters properly, provided that you supply it with a suitable \file{csf} file and give the |--csfile| switch on the command line. This also implies that it is possible to apply language specific sorting rules to the bibliography. The \sty{biblatex} package comes with \file{csf} files for some common Western European encodings. \bin{bibtex8} also ships with a few \file{csf} files. Note that \file{biblatex.bst} can not detect if it is running under traditional \bibtex or \file{bibtex8}, hence the \opt{bibtex8} package option. By default, sorting is case-insensitive since this is required for traditional \bibtex. If the \opt{bibtex8} package option is enabled, sorting is case-sensitive.
+Switching to \file{bibtex8} will help in such cases. \file{bibtex8} can sort case"=sensitively and it can handle 8-bit characters properly, provided that you supply it with a suitable \file{csf} file and give the |--csfile| switch on the command line. This also implies that it is possible to apply language specific sorting rules to the bibliography. The \biblatex package comes with \file{csf} files for some common Western European encodings. \bin{bibtex8} also ships with a few \file{csf} files. Note that \file{biblatex.bst} can not detect if it is running under traditional \bibtex or \file{bibtex8}, hence the \opt{bibtex8} package option. By default, sorting is case-insensitive since this is required for traditional \bibtex. If the \opt{bibtex8} package option is enabled, sorting is case-sensitive.
 
 Since \file{bibtex8} is backwards compatible with traditional \bibtex, it is possible to mix 8-bit input and Ascii notation. This is useful if the encoding used in the \file{bib} file does not cover all required characters. There are also a few marginal cases in which the Ascii notation scheme would yield better sorting results. A typical example is the ligature <œ>. \file{bibtex8} will handle this ligature like a single character. Depending on the sorting scheme defined in the \file{csf} file, it could be treated like an <o> or alphabetized after the letter <o> but it can not be sorted as <oe>. The Ascii notation (|\oe|) is equivalent to <oe> during sorting:
 
@@ -1816,12 +1822,26 @@ Supporting Unicode implies much more than handling \utf input. Unicode is a comp
 \usepackage[backend=biber,sortlocale=de]{biblatex}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-If the language of the document corresponds to the main locale of the operating system, \opt{sortlocale} is
-omissible as \biber will detect the locale settings of the environment automatically. Note that this will also work with 8-bit encodings such as Latin\,9, \ie you can take advantage of Unicode-based sorting even though you are not using \utf input. See \secref{bib:cav:enc:enc} on how to specify input and data encodings properly.
+or if you are using german as the main document language via Babel or Polyglossia:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\usepackage[backend=biber,sortlocale=auto]{biblatex}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+This will make \biblatex pass the Babel/Polyglossia main document language
+as the locale which \biber will map into a suitable default locale. \biber
+will not try to get locale information from its environment as this makes
+document processing dependent on something not in the document which is
+against \tex's spirit of reproducibility. This also makes sense since
+Babel/Polyglossia are in fact the relevant environment for a document. Note
+that this will also work with 8-bit encodings such as Latin\,9, \ie you can
+take advantage of Unicode-based sorting even though you are not using \utf
+input. See \secref{bib:cav:enc:enc} on how to specify input and data
+encodings properly.
 
 \paragraph{Specifying Encodings}
 \label{bib:cav:enc:enc}
-When using a non-Ascii encoding in the \file{bib} file, it is important to understand what \sty{biblatex} can do for you and what may require manual intervention. The package takes care of the \latex side, \ie it ensures that the data imported from the \file{bbl} file is interpreted correctly, provided that the \opt{bibencoding} package option is set properly. Depending on the backend, the \bibtex side may demand attention, too. When using \bin{bibtex8}, you need to supply \bin{bibtex8} with a matching \file{csf} file as it needs to know about the encoding of the \file{bib} file to be able to alphabetize the entries correctly. Unfortunately, there is no way for \sty{biblatex} to pass this information to \bin{bibtex8} automatically. The only way is setting its |--csfile| option on the command line when running \bin{bibtex8}. When using \biber, all of this is handled automatically and no further steps, apart from setting the \opt{bibencoding} option in certain cases, are required. Here are a few typical usage scenarios along with the relevant lines from the document preamble:
+When using a non-Ascii encoding in the \file{bib} file, it is important to understand what \biblatex can do for you and what may require manual intervention. The package takes care of the \latex side, \ie it ensures that the data imported from the \file{bbl} file is interpreted correctly, provided that the \opt{bibencoding} package option is set properly. Depending on the backend, the \bibtex side may demand attention, too. When using \bin{bibtex8}, you need to supply \bin{bibtex8} with a matching \file{csf} file as it needs to know about the encoding of the \file{bib} file to be able to alphabetize the entries correctly. Unfortunately, there is no way for \biblatex to pass this information to \bin{bibtex8} automatically. The only way is setting its |--csfile| option on the command line when running \bin{bibtex8}. When using \biber, all of this is handled automatically and no further steps, apart from setting the \opt{bibencoding} option in certain cases, are required. Here are a few typical usage scenarios along with the relevant lines from the document preamble:
 
 \begin{itemize}
 \setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}
@@ -1881,7 +1901,7 @@ The same scenario with \xetex or \luatex in native \utf mode:
 
 \end{itemize}
 
-\biber can handle Ascii notation, 8-bit encodings such as Latin\,1, and \utf. It is also capable of reencoding the \file{bib} data on the fly (replacing the limited macro-level reencoding feature of \sty{biblatex}). This will happen automatically if required, provided that you specify the encoding of the \file{bib} files properly. In addition to the scenarios discussed above, \biber can also handle the following cases:
+\biber can handle Ascii notation, 8-bit encodings such as Latin\,1, and \utf. It is also capable of reencoding the \file{bib} data on the fly (replacing the limited macro-level reencoding feature of \biblatex). This will happen automatically if required, provided that you specify the encoding of the \file{bib} files properly. In addition to the scenarios discussed above, \biber can also handle the following cases:
 
 \begin{itemize}
 
@@ -1914,7 +1934,7 @@ The same scenario with \xetex or \luatex in native \utf mode:
 
 \end{itemize}
 
-Some workarounds may be required when using traditional \tex or \pdftex with \utf encoding because \sty{inputenc}'s \file{utf8} module does not cover all of Unicode. Roughly speaking, it only covers the Western European Unicode range. When loading \sty{inputenc} with the \file{utf8} option, \sty{biblatex} will normally instruct \biber to reencode the \file{bib} data to \utf. This may lead to \sty{inputenc} errors if some of the characters in the \file{bib} file are outside the limited Unicode range supported by \sty{inputenc}.
+Some workarounds may be required when using traditional \tex or \pdftex with \utf encoding because \sty{inputenc}'s \file{utf8} module does not cover all of Unicode. Roughly speaking, it only covers the Western European Unicode range. When loading \sty{inputenc} with the \file{utf8} option, \biblatex will normally instruct \biber to reencode the \file{bib} data to \utf. This may lead to \sty{inputenc} errors if some of the characters in the \file{bib} file are outside the limited Unicode range supported by \sty{inputenc}.
 
 \begin{itemize}
 
@@ -1925,7 +1945,7 @@ Some workarounds may be required when using traditional \tex or \pdftex with \ut
 \usepackage[safeinputenc]{biblatex}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will ignore \sty{inputenc}'s \opt{utf8} option and use Ascii. \biber will then try to convert the \file{bib} data to Ascii notation. For example, it will convert \texttt{\k{S}} to |\k{S}|. This option is similar to setting \kvopt{texencoding}{ascii} but will only take effect in this specific scenario (\sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx} with \utf). This workaround takes advantage of the fact that both Unicode and the \utf transport encoding are backwards compatible with Ascii.
+If this option is enabled, \biblatex will ignore \sty{inputenc}'s \opt{utf8} option and use Ascii. \biber will then try to convert the \file{bib} data to Ascii notation. For example, it will convert \texttt{\k{S}} to |\k{S}|. This option is similar to setting \kvopt{texencoding}{ascii} but will only take effect in this specific scenario (\sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx} with \utf). This workaround takes advantage of the fact that both Unicode and the \utf transport encoding are backwards compatible with Ascii.
 
 \end{itemize}
 
@@ -1946,14 +1966,14 @@ but also less obvious things like:
 \subsubsection{Editors and Compiler Scripts}
 \label{bib:cav:ide}
 
-This section is in need of an update to match the new script interface used by \sty{biblatex}. For the time being, see the documentation of the \sty{logreq} package\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/logreq/} and the Biblatex Developer's Wiki for a draft spec.\fnurl{http://sourceforge.net/apps/mediawiki/biblatex/index.php?title=Workflow_Automation}
+This section is in need of an update to match the new script interface used by \biblatex. For the time being, see the documentation of the \sty{logreq} package\fnurl{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/logreq/} and the Biblatex Developer's Wiki for a draft spec.\fnurl{http://sourceforge.net/apps/mediawiki/biblatex/index.php?title=Workflow_Automation}
 
 % FIXME: update!
 
 \section{User Guide}
 \label{use}
 
-This part of the manual documents the user interface of the \sty{biblatex} package. The user guide covers everything you need to know in order to use \sty{biblatex} with the default styles that come with this package. You should read the user guide first in any case. If you want to write your own citation and\slash or bibliography styles, continue with the author guide afterwards.
+This part of the manual documents the user interface of the \biblatex package. The user guide covers everything you need to know in order to use \biblatex with the default styles that come with this package. You should read the user guide first in any case. If you want to write your own citation and\slash or bibliography styles, continue with the author guide afterwards.
 
 \subsection{Package Options}
 \label{use:opt}
@@ -1963,7 +1983,7 @@ All package options are given in \keyval notation. The value \texttt{true} is om
 \subsubsection{Load-time Options}
 \label{use:opt:ldt}
 
-The following options must be used as \sty{biblatex} is loaded, \ie in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage}.
+The following options must be used as \biblatex is loaded, \ie in the optional argument to \cmd{usepackage}.
 
 \begin{optionlist}
 
@@ -1973,13 +1993,13 @@ Specifies the database backend. The following backends are supported:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 
-\item[biber] \biber, the default backend of \sty{biblatex}, supports Ascii, 8-bit encodings, \utf, on-the-fly reencoding, locale"=specific sorting, and many other features. Locale"=specific sorting, case"=sensitive sorting, and upper\slash lowercase precedence are controlled by the options \opt{sortlocale}, \opt{sortcase}, and \opt{sortupper}, respectively.
+\item[biber] \biber, the default backend of \biblatex, supports Ascii, 8-bit encodings, \utf, on-the-fly reencoding, locale"=specific sorting, and many other features. Locale"=specific sorting, case"=sensitive sorting, and upper\slash lowercase precedence are controlled by the options \opt{sortlocale}, \opt{sortcase}, and \opt{sortupper}, respectively.
 
 \item[bibtex] Legacy \bibtex. Traditional \bibtex supports Ascii encoding only. Sorting is always case"=insensitive.
 
 \item[bibtex8] \bin{bibtex8}, the 8-bit implementation of \bibtex, supports Ascii and 8-bit encodings such as Latin~1. Depending on the \file{csf} file, case"=sensitive sorting may be supported.
 
-\item[bibtexu] \bin{bibtexu} is a Unicode-enabled implementation of \bibtex which supports \utf. Note that \bin{bibtexu} is not actively supported by \sty{biblatex} and has not been tested as backend in any way. \biber is the recommended backend.
+\item[bibtexu] \bin{bibtexu} is a Unicode-enabled implementation of \bibtex which supports \utf. Note that \bin{bibtexu} is not actively supported by \biblatex and has not been tested as backend in any way. \biber is the recommended backend.
 
 \end{valuelist}
 
@@ -2044,9 +2064,9 @@ Whether or not to sort the bibliography and the list of shorthands case"=sensiti
 
 This option corresponds to \biber's |--sortupper| command-line option. It has no effect with any other backend. If enabled, the bibliography is sorted in <uppercase before lowercase> order. Disabling this option means <lowercase before uppercase> order.
 
-\optitem{sortlocale}{\prm{locale}}[\BiberOnly]
+\optitem{sortlocale}{\opt{auto}, \prm{locale}}[\BiberOnly]
 
-This option corresponds to \biber's |--sortlocale| command-line option. It has no effect with any other backend. If set, it specifies the locale to be used for sorting. While \sty{biblatex} provides no default value for this option, \biber will inherit the locale settings from the environment if no locale has been specified explicitly.
+This option sets the global sorting locale. Every sorting scheme inherits this locale if none is specified using the \prm{locale} option to \cmd{printbibliography}. Setting this to \opt{auto} requests that it be set to the Babel/Polyglossia main document language identifier, if these packages are used and \texttt{en\_US} otherwise. \biber will map Babel/Polyglossia language identifiers into sensible locale identifiers (see the \biber documentation). You can therefore specify either a normal locale identifier like \texttt{de\_DE\_phonebook}, \texttt{es\_ES} or one of the supported Babel/Polyglossia language identifiers if the mapping \biber makes of this is fine for you.
 
 \optitem[los]{sortlos}{\opt{bib}, \opt{los}}[\BibTeXOnly]
 
@@ -2057,7 +2077,7 @@ The sorting order of the list of shorthands. The following choices are available
 \item[los] Sort by shorthand.
 \end{valuelist}
 
-The sorting order of shorthands with \biber is more flexible and is set with the \opt{sorting} option to the \cmd{printshorthands} command.
+The sorting order of shorthands with \biber is more flexible and is set with the \opt{sorting} option to the \cmd{printbiblist} command.
 
 \boolitem[true]{related}[\BiberOnly]
 
@@ -2109,15 +2129,15 @@ This option controls whether the citation commands scan ahead for punctuation ma
 
 \optitem[autobib]{language}{\opt{autobib}, \opt{autocite}, \opt{auto}, \prm{language}}
 
-This option controls multilingual support. When set to \opt{autobib}, \opt{autocite} or \opt{auto}, \sty{biblatex} will try to get the main document language from the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} package (and fall back to English if \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} is not available). It is also possible to select the document language manually. In this case, the \opt{autolang} option below will have no effect. Please refer to \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} for a list of supported languages and the corresponding identifiers. \opt{autobib} switches the language for each entry in the bibliography using the \bibfield{langid} field and the language environment specified by the \opt{autolang} option. \opt{autocite} switches the language for each citation using the \bibfield{langid} field and the language environment specified by the \opt{autolang} option. \opt{auto} is a shorthand to set both \opt{autobib} and \opt{autocite}. The default is to switch languages automatically only for bibliography entries (\opt{autobib}).
+This option controls multilingual support. When set to \opt{autobib}, \opt{autocite} or \opt{auto}, \biblatex will try to get the main document language from the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} package (and fall back to English if \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} is not available). It is also possible to select the document language manually. In this case, the \opt{autolang} option below will have no effect. Please refer to \tabref{bib:fld:tab1} for a list of supported languages and the corresponding identifiers. \opt{autobib} switches the language for each entry in the bibliography using the \bibfield{langid} field and the language environment specified by the \opt{autolang} option. \opt{autocite} switches the language for each citation using the \bibfield{langid} field and the language environment specified by the \opt{autolang} option. \opt{auto} is a shorthand to set both \opt{autobib} and \opt{autocite}. The default is to switch languages automatically only for bibliography entries (\opt{autobib}).
 
 \boolitem[true]{clearlang}
 
-If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will automatically clear the \bibfield{language} field of all entries whose language matches the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language of the document (or the language specified explicitly with the \opt{language} option) in order to omit redundant language specifications. The language mappings required by this feature are provided by the \cmd{DeclareRedundantLanguages} command from \secref{aut:lng:cmd}.
+If this option is enabled, \biblatex will automatically clear the \bibfield{language} field of all entries whose language matches the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language of the document (or the language specified explicitly with the \opt{language} option) in order to omit redundant language specifications. The language mappings required by this feature are provided by the \cmd{DeclareRedundantLanguages} command from \secref{aut:lng:cmd}.
 
 \optitem[none]{autolang}{\opt{none}, \opt{hyphen}, \opt{other}, \opt{other*}, \opt{langname}}
 
-This option controls which \sty{babel} language environment\footnote{\sty{polyglossia} understands the \sty{babel} language environments too and so this option controls both the \sty{babel} and \sty{polyglossia} language environments.} is used if the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} package is loaded and a bibliography entry includes a \bibfield{langid} field (see \secref{bib:fld:spc}). Note that \sty{biblatex} automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} is loaded. In multilingual documents, it will also continually adjust to the current language as far as citations and the default language of the bibliography is concerned. This option is for switching languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. The possible choices are:
+This option controls which \sty{babel} language environment\footnote{\sty{polyglossia} understands the \sty{babel} language environments too and so this option controls both the \sty{babel} and \sty{polyglossia} language environments.} is used if the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} package is loaded and a bibliography entry includes a \bibfield{langid} field (see \secref{bib:fld:spc}). Note that \biblatex automatically adjusts to the main document language if \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} is loaded. In multilingual documents, it will also continually adjust to the current language as far as citations and the default language of the bibliography is concerned. This option is for switching languages on a per"=entry basis within the bibliography. The possible choices are:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 
@@ -2128,10 +2148,10 @@ Disable this feature, \ie do not use any language environment at all.
 Enclose the entry in a \env{hyphenrules} environment. This will load hyphenation patterns for the language specified in the \env{hyphenation} field of the entry, if available.
 
 \item[other]
-Enclose the entry in an \env{otherlanguage} environment. This will load hyphenation patterns for the specified language, enable all extra definitions which \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} and \sty{biblatex} provide for the respective language, and translate key terms such as <editor> and <volume>. The extra definitions include localizations of the date format, of ordinals, and similar things.
+Enclose the entry in an \env{otherlanguage} environment. This will load hyphenation patterns for the specified language, enable all extra definitions which \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} and \biblatex provide for the respective language, and translate key terms such as <editor> and <volume>. The extra definitions include localizations of the date format, of ordinals, and similar things.
 
 \item[other*]
-Enclose the entry in an \env{otherlanguage*} environment. Please note that \sty{biblatex} treats \env{otherlanguage*} like \env{otherlanguage} but other packages may make a distinction in this case.
+Enclose the entry in an \env{otherlanguage*} environment. Please note that \biblatex treats \env{otherlanguage*} like \env{otherlanguage} but other packages may make a distinction in this case.
 
 \item[langname]
 \sty{polyglossia} only. Enclose the entry in a \env{<languagename>} environment. The benefit of this option value for \sty{polyglossia} users is that it takes note of the \bibfield{langidopts} field so that you can add per-language options to an entry (like selecting a language variant). When using \sty{babel}, this option does the same as the \opt{other} option value.
@@ -2174,7 +2194,7 @@ Whether or not to transform citations and back references into clickable hyperli
 
 \boolitem[false]{backref}
 
-Whether or not to print back references in the bibliography. The back references are a list of page numbers indicating the pages on which the respective bibliography entry is cited. If there are \env{refsection} environments in the document, the back references are local to the reference sections. Strictly speaking, this option only controls whether the \sty{biblatex} package collects the data required to print such references. This feature still has to be supported by the selected bibliography style. All standard styles which ship with this package do so.
+Whether or not to print back references in the bibliography. The back references are a list of page numbers indicating the pages on which the respective bibliography entry is cited. If there are \env{refsection} environments in the document, the back references are local to the reference sections. Strictly speaking, this option only controls whether the \biblatex package collects the data required to print such references. This feature still has to be supported by the selected bibliography style. All standard styles which ship with this package do so.
 
 \optitem[three]{backrefstyle}{\opt{none}, \opt{three}, \opt{two}, \opt{two+}, \opt{three+}, \opt{all+}}
 
@@ -2247,7 +2267,7 @@ This option automatically starts a new reference section at a document division
 \item[subsection] Start a reference section at every \cmd{subsection} command.
 \end{valuelist}
 %
-The starred versions if these commands will not start a new reference section.
+The starred versions of these commands will not start a new reference section.
 
 \optitem[none]{refsegment}{\opt{none}, \opt{part}, \opt{chapter}, \opt{section}, \opt{subsection}}
 
@@ -2265,7 +2285,7 @@ This option automatically executes the \cmd{citereset} command from \secref{use:
 \item[subsection] Perform a reset at every \cmd{subsection} command.
 \end{valuelist}
 %
-The starred versions if these commands will not trigger a reset.
+The starred versions of these commands will not trigger a reset.
 
 \boolitem[true]{abbreviate}
 
@@ -2351,11 +2371,11 @@ See \secref{use:use:epr} for details on support for arXiv and electronic publish
 
 \optitem[auto]{texencoding}{\opt{auto}, \prm{encoding}}
 
-Specifies the encoding of the \file{tex} file. This option affects the data transferred from the backend to \sty{biblatex}. When using \biber, this corresponds to \biber's |--output_encoding| option. The following choices are available:
+Specifies the encoding of the \file{tex} file. This option affects the data transferred from the backend to \biblatex. When using \biber, this corresponds to \biber's |--output_encoding| option. The following choices are available:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 
-\item[auto] Try to auto-detect the input encoding. If the \sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx}\slash \sty{luainputenc} package is available, \sty{biblatex} will get the main encoding from that package. If not, it assumes \utf encoding if \xetex or \luatex has been detected, and Ascii otherwise.
+\item[auto] Try to auto-detect the input encoding. If the \sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx}\slash \sty{luainputenc} package is available, \biblatex will get the main encoding from that package. If not, it assumes \utf encoding if \xetex or \luatex has been detected, and Ascii otherwise.
 
 \item[\prm{encoding}] Specifies the \prm{encoding} explicitly. This is for odd cases in which auto-detection fails or you want to force a certain encoding for some reason.
 
@@ -2365,7 +2385,7 @@ Note that setting \kvopt{texencoding}{\prm{encoding}} will also affect the \opt{
 
 \optitem[auto]{bibencoding}{\opt{auto}, \prm{encoding}}
 
-Specifies the encoding of the \file{bib} files. When using \biber, this corresponds to \biber's |--output_encoding| option. The following choices are available:
+Specifies the encoding of the \file{bib} files. When using \biber, this corresponds to \biber's |--input_encoding| option. The following choices are available:
 
 \begin{valuelist}
 
@@ -2375,19 +2395,19 @@ Specifies the encoding of the \file{bib} files. When using \biber, this correspo
 
 \end{valuelist}
 
-By default, \sty{biblatex} assumes that the \file{tex} file and the \file{bib} file use the same encoding (\kvopt{bibencoding}{auto}). Note that some backends only support a limited number of encodings. See \secref{bib:cav:enc} for further instructions.
+By default, \biblatex assumes that the \file{tex} file and the \file{bib} file use the same encoding (\kvopt{bibencoding}{auto}). Note that some backends only support a limited number of encodings. See \secref{bib:cav:enc} for further instructions.
 
 \boolitem[false]{safeinputenc}[\BiberOnly]
 
-If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will automatically force \kvopt{texencoding}{ascii} if the \sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx} package has been loaded and the input encoding is \utf, \ie it will ignore any macro-based \utf support and use Ascii only. \biber will then try to convert any non-Ascii data in the \file{bib} file to Ascii. For example, it will convert \texttt{\d{S}} to |\d{S}|. See \secref{bib:cav:enc:enc} for an explanation of why you may want to enable this option.
+If this option is enabled, \biblatex will automatically force \kvopt{texencoding}{ascii} if the \sty{inputenc}\slash \sty{inputenx} package has been loaded and the input encoding is \utf, \ie it will ignore any macro-based \utf support and use Ascii only. \biber will then try to convert any non-Ascii data in the \file{bib} file to Ascii. For example, it will convert \texttt{\d{S}} to |\d{S}|. See \secref{bib:cav:enc:enc} for an explanation of why you may want to enable this option.
 
 \boolitem[true]{bibwarn}
 
-By default, \sty{biblatex} will report warnings issued by the backend concerning the data in the \file{bib} file as \latex warnings. Use this option to suppress such warnings.
+By default, \biblatex will report warnings issued by the backend concerning the data in the \file{bib} file as \latex warnings. Use this option to suppress such warnings.
 
 \intitem[2]{mincrossrefs}
 
-Sets the minimum number of cross references to \prm{integer} when requesting a backend run.\footnote{If an entry which is cross-referenced by other entries in the \file{bib} file hits this threshold, it is included in the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This is a standard feature of the \bibtex (also \biber) and not specific to \sty{biblatex}. See the description of the \bibfield{crossref} field in \secref{bib:fld:spc} for further information.} Note that when using the \bibtex backend, this package option merely affects the format of certain requests written to the transcript file. It will not have any effect if the editor or compiler script launching \bibtex does not include dedicated \sty{biblatex} support or if \bibtex is manually launched from the command"=line.\footnote{As of this writing, no \latex editors or compiler scripts with dedicated \sty{biblatex} support are known, but this will hopefully change in the future.} See \secref{bib:cav:ide} for details. This option also affects the handling of the \bibfield{xref} field. See the field description in \secref{bib:fld:spc} as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref} for details.
+Sets the minimum number of cross references to \prm{integer} when requesting a backend run.\footnote{If an entry which is cross-referenced by other entries in the \file{bib} file hits this threshold, it is included in the bibliography even if it has not been cited explicitly. This is a standard feature of the \bibtex (also \biber) and not specific to \biblatex. See the description of the \bibfield{crossref} field in \secref{bib:fld:spc} for further information.} Note that when using the \bibtex backend, this package option merely affects the format of certain requests written to the transcript file. It will not have any effect if the editor or compiler script launching \bibtex does not include dedicated \biblatex support or if \bibtex is manually launched from the command"=line.\footnote{As of this writing, no \latex editors or compiler scripts with dedicated \biblatex support are known, but this will hopefully change in the future.} See \secref{bib:cav:ide} for details. This option also affects the handling of the \bibfield{xref} field. See the field description in \secref{bib:fld:spc} as well as \secref{bib:cav:ref} for details.
 
 \end{optionlist}
 
@@ -2522,7 +2542,7 @@ This option controls the parenthesis tracker which keeps track of nested parenth
 
 \intitem[3]{maxparens}
 
-The maximum permitted nesting level of parentheses and brackets. If parentheses and brackets are nested deeper than this value, \sty{biblatex} will issue errors.
+The maximum permitted nesting level of parentheses and brackets. If parentheses and brackets are nested deeper than this value, \biblatex will issue errors.
 
 \boolitem[false]{firstinits}
 
@@ -2534,7 +2554,7 @@ When enabled, sorting names will only use their initials. \BiberOnlyMark This is
 
 \boolitem[false]{terseinits}
 
-This option controls the format of initials generated by \sty{biblatex}. If enabled, initials are rendered using a terse format without dots and spaces. For example, the initials of Donald Ervin Knuth would be rendered as <D.~E.> by default, and as <DE> if this option is enabled. The option will affect the \cmd{ifterseinits} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, the option works by redefining some macros which control the format of initials. See \secref{use:cav:nam} for details.
+This option controls the format of initials generated by \biblatex. If enabled, initials are rendered using a terse format without dots and spaces. For example, the initials of Donald Ervin Knuth would be rendered as <D.~E.> by default, and as <DE> if this option is enabled. The option will affect the \cmd{ifterseinits} test from \secref{aut:aux:tst}. \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, the option works by redefining some macros which control the format of initials. See \secref{use:cav:nam} for details.
 
 \boolitem[false]{labelalpha}
 
@@ -2663,7 +2683,7 @@ With the standard styles, the \bibfield{translator} is printed after the title b
 
 \boolitem[false]{useprefix}
 
-Whether the name prefix (von, van, of, da, de, della, etc.) is considered when printing the last name in citations. This also affects the sorting and formatting of the bibliography as well as the generation of certain types of labels. If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} always precedes the last name with the prefix. For example, Ludwig van Beethoven would be cited as «Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Beethoven, Ludwig van» by default. If this option is enabled, he is cited as «van Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Van Beethoven, Ludwig» instead.
+Whether the name prefix (von, van, of, da, de, della, etc.) is considered when printing the last name in citations. This also affects the sorting and formatting of the bibliography as well as the generation of certain types of labels. If this option is enabled, \biblatex always precedes the last name with the prefix. For example, Ludwig van Beethoven would be cited as «Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Beethoven, Ludwig van» by default. If this option is enabled, he is cited as «van Beethoven» and alphabetized as «Van Beethoven, Ludwig» instead.
 \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \optitem{indexing}{\opt{true}, \opt{false}, \opt{cite}, \opt{bib}}
@@ -2691,7 +2711,7 @@ If this option is enabled, the entry is excluded from the list of shorthands. It
 
 \boolitem[false]{skiplab}
 
-If this option is enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign any labels to the entry. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique citations for the respective entry and citations styles which require labels may fail to create valid citations for the entry.
+If this option is enabled, \biblatex will not assign any labels to the entry. It is not required for normal operation. Use it with care. If enabled, \biblatex can not guarantee unique citations for the respective entry and citations styles which require labels may fail to create valid citations for the entry.
 \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, this option is also settable on a per-type basis.
 
 \boolitem[false]{dataonly}
@@ -2745,7 +2765,7 @@ This command may also be used in the configuration file to modify the default se
 \subsection{Standard Styles}
 \label{use:xbx}
 
-This section provides a short description of all bibliography and citation styles which ship with the \sty{biblatex} package. If you want to write your own styles, see \secref{aut}.
+This section provides a short description of all bibliography and citation styles which ship with the \biblatex package. If you want to write your own styles, see \secref{aut}.
 
 \subsubsection{Citation Styles}
 \label{use:xbx:cbx}
@@ -2882,7 +2902,7 @@ This style prints all bibliographic data in tabular format. It is intended for d
 \subsection{Related Entries}
 \label{use:rel}
 
-Almost all bibliography styles require authors to specify certain types of relationship between entries such as «Reprint of», «Reprinted in» etc. It is impossible to provide data fields to cover all of these relationships and so \sty{biblatex} provides a general mechanism for this using the entry fields \bibfield{related}, \bibfield{relatedtype} and \bibfield{relatedstring}. A related entry does not need to be cited and does not appear in the bibliography itself (unless of course it is also cited itself independently) as a clone is taken of the related entry to be used as a data source. The \bibfield{relatedtype} field should specify a localization string which will be printed before the information from the related entries is printed, for example «Orig. Pub. as». The \bibfield{relatedstring} field can be used to override the string determined via \bibfield{relatedtype}. Some examples:
+Almost all bibliography styles require authors to specify certain types of relationship between entries such as «Reprint of», «Reprinted in» etc. It is impossible to provide data fields to cover all of these relationships and so \biblatex provides a general mechanism for this using the entry fields \bibfield{related}, \bibfield{relatedtype} and \bibfield{relatedstring}. A related entry does not need to be cited and does not appear in the bibliography itself (unless of course it is also cited itself independently) as a clone is taken of the related entry to be used as a data source. The \bibfield{relatedtype} field should specify a localization string which will be printed before the information from the related entries is printed, for example «Orig. Pub. as». The \bibfield{relatedstring} field can be used to override the string determined via \bibfield{relatedtype}. Some examples:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 @Book{key1,
@@ -2955,13 +2975,13 @@ You can use the \bibfield{relatedoptions} to set options on the related entry da
 \subsection{Sorting Options}
 \label{use:srt}
 
-This package supports various sorting schemes for the bibliography. The sorting scheme is selected with the \opt{sorting} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Apart from the regular data fields there are also some special fields which may be used to optimize the sorting of the bibliography. \Apxref{apx:srt:a1, apx:srt:a2} give an outline of the alphabetic sorting schemes supported by \sty{biblatex}. Chronological sorting schemes are listed in \apxref{apx:srt:chr}. A few explanations concerning these schemes are in order.
+This package supports various sorting schemes for the bibliography. The sorting scheme is selected with the \opt{sorting} package option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. Apart from the regular data fields there are also some special fields which may be used to optimize the sorting of the bibliography. \Apxref{apx:srt:a1, apx:srt:a2} give an outline of the alphabetic sorting schemes supported by \biblatex. Chronological sorting schemes are listed in \apxref{apx:srt:chr}. A few explanations concerning these schemes are in order.
 
-The first item considered in the sorting process is always the \bibfield{presort} field of the entry. If this field is undefined, \sty{biblatex} will use the default value <\texttt{mm}> as a presort string. The next item considered is the \bibfield{sortkey} field. If this field is defined, it serves as the master sort key. Apart from the \bibfield{presort} field, no further data is considered in this case. If the \bibfield{sortkey} field is undefined, sorting continues with the name. The package will try using the \bibfield{sortname}, \bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, and \bibfield{translator} fields, in this order. Which fields are considered also depends on the setting of the \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} options. If all three of them are disabled, the \bibfield{sortname} field is ignored as well. Note that all name fields are responsive to \opt{maxnames} and \opt{minnames}. If no name field is available, either because all of them are undefined or because \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} are disabled, \sty{biblatex} will fall back to the \bibfield{sorttitle} and \bibfield{title} fields as a last resort. The remaining items are, in various order: the \bibfield{sortyear} field, if defined, or the first four digits of the \bibfield{year} field otherwise; the \bibfield{sorttitle} field, if defined, or the \bibfield{title} field otherwise; the \bibfield{volume} field, which is padded to four digits with leading zeros, or the string \texttt{0000} otherwise. Note that the sorting schemes shown in \apxref{apx:srt:a2} include an additional item: \bibfield{labelalpha} is the label used by <alphabetic> bibliography styles. Strictly speaking, the string used for sorting is \bibfield{labelalpha}~+ \bibfield{extraalpha}. The sorting schemes in \apxref{apx:srt:a2} are intended to be used in conjunction with alphabetic styles only.
+The first item considered in the sorting process is always the \bibfield{presort} field of the entry. If this field is undefined, \biblatex will use the default value <\texttt{mm}> as a presort string. The next item considered is the \bibfield{sortkey} field. If this field is defined, it serves as the master sort key. Apart from the \bibfield{presort} field, no further data is considered in this case. If the \bibfield{sortkey} field is undefined, sorting continues with the name. The package will try using the \bibfield{sortname}, \bibfield{author}, \bibfield{editor}, and \bibfield{translator} fields, in this order. Which fields are considered also depends on the setting of the \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} options. If all three of them are disabled, the \bibfield{sortname} field is ignored as well. Note that all name fields are responsive to \opt{maxnames} and \opt{minnames}. If no name field is available, either because all of them are undefined or because \opt{useauthor}, \opt{useeditor}, and \opt{usetranslator} are disabled, \biblatex will fall back to the \bibfield{sorttitle} and \bibfield{title} fields as a last resort. The remaining items are, in various order: the \bibfield{sortyear} field, if defined, or the first four digits of the \bibfield{year} field otherwise; the \bibfield{sorttitle} field, if defined, or the \bibfield{title} field otherwise; the \bibfield{volume} field, which is padded to four digits with leading zeros, or the string \texttt{0000} otherwise. Note that the sorting schemes shown in \apxref{apx:srt:a2} include an additional item: \bibfield{labelalpha} is the label used by <alphabetic> bibliography styles. Strictly speaking, the string used for sorting is \bibfield{labelalpha}~+ \bibfield{extraalpha}. The sorting schemes in \apxref{apx:srt:a2} are intended to be used in conjunction with alphabetic styles only.
 
 The chronological sorting schemes presented in \apxref{apx:srt:chr} also make use of the \bibfield{presort} and \bibfield{sortkey} fields, if defined. The next item considered is the \bibfield{sortyear} or the \bibfield{year} field, depending on availability. The \opt{ynt} scheme extracts the first four Arabic figures from the field. If both fields are undefined, the string \texttt{9999} is used as a fallback value. This means that all entries without a year will be moved to the end of the list. The \opt{ydnt} scheme is similar in concept but sorts the year in descending order. As with the \opt{ynt} scheme, the string \texttt{9999} is used as a fallback value. The remaining items are similar to the alphabetic sorting schemes discussed above. Note that the \opt{ydnt} sorting scheme will only sort the date in descending order. All other items are sorted in ascending order as usual.
 
-Using special fields such as \bibfield{sortkey}, \bibfield{sortname}, or \bibfield{sorttitle} is usually not required. The \sty{biblatex} package is quite capable of working out the desired sorting order by using the data found in the regular fields of an entry. You will only need them if you want to manually modify the sorting order of the bibliography or if any data required for sorting is missing. Please refer to the field descriptions in \secref{bib:fld:spc} for details on possible uses of the special fields. Also note that using \biber instead of legacy \bibtex is strongly recommended.
+Using special fields such as \bibfield{sortkey}, \bibfield{sortname}, or \bibfield{sorttitle} is usually not required. The \biblatex package is quite capable of working out the desired sorting order by using the data found in the regular fields of an entry. You will only need them if you want to manually modify the sorting order of the bibliography or if any data required for sorting is missing. Please refer to the field descriptions in \secref{bib:fld:spc} for details on possible uses of the special fields. Also note that using \biber instead of legacy \bibtex is strongly recommended.
 
 \subsection{Bibliography Commands}
 \label{use:bib}
@@ -3041,11 +3061,11 @@ This command prints the bibliography. It takes one optional argument, which is a
 
 \valitem[bibliography/shorthands]{env}{name}
 
-The <high-level> layout of the bibliography and the list of shorthands is controlled by environments defined with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. This option selects an environment. The \prm{name} corresponds to the identifier used when defining the environment with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. By default, the \cmd{printbibliography} command uses the identifier \texttt{bibliography}; \cmd{printshorthands} uses \texttt{shorthands}. See also \secref{use:bib:los,use:bib:hdg}.
+The <high-level> layout of the bibliography and the list of shorthands is controlled by environments defined with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. This option selects an environment. The \prm{name} corresponds to the identifier used when defining the environment with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. By default, the \cmd{printbibliography} command uses the identifier \texttt{bibliography}; \cmd{printbiblist} uses \texttt{shorthands}. See also \secref{use:bib:biblist,use:bib:hdg}.
 
 \valitem[bibliography/shorthands]{heading}{name}
 
-The bibliography and the list of shorthands typically have a chapter or section heading. This option selects the heading \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibheading}. By default, the \cmd{printbibliography} command uses the heading \texttt{bibliography}; \cmd{printshorthands} uses \texttt{shorthands}. See also \secref{use:bib:los,use:bib:hdg}.
+The bibliography and the list of shorthands typically have a chapter or section heading. This option selects the heading \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibheading}. By default, the \cmd{printbibliography} command uses the heading \texttt{bibliography}; \cmd{printbiblist} uses \texttt{shorthands}. See also \secref{use:bib:biblist,use:bib:hdg}.
 
 \valitem{title}{text}
 
@@ -3115,13 +3135,13 @@ Filter the entries with check \prm{name}, as defined with \cmd{defbibcheck}. See
 
 This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. Setting this option will implicitly enable \opt{resetnumbers} for the current bibliography. The option assigns the \prm{string} as a prefix to all entries in the respective bibliography. For example, if the \prm{string} is \texttt{A}, the numerical labels printed will be \texttt{[A1]}, \texttt{[A2]}, \texttt{[A3]}, etc. This is useful for subdivided numerical bibliographies where each subbibliography uses a different prefix. The \prm{string} is available to styles in the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of all affected entries. See \secref{aut:bbx:fld:lab} for details.
 
-\boolitem{resetnumbers}
+\valitem{resetnumbers}{true,false,number}
 
-This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, it will reset the numerical labels assigned to the entries in the respective bibliography, \ie the numbering will restart at~1. Use this option with care as \sty{biblatex} can not guarantee unique labels globally if they are reset manually.
+This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, it will reset the numerical labels assigned to the entries in the respective bibliography, \ie the numbering will restart at~1. You can also pass a number to this option, for example: \texttt{resetnumbers=10} to reset numbering to the specified number to aid numbering continuity across documents. Use this option with care as \biblatex can not guarantee unique labels globally if they are reset manually.
 
 \boolitem{omitnumbers}
 
-This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, \sty{biblatex} will not assign a numerical label to the entries in the respective bibliography. This is useful when mixing a numerical subbibliography with one or more subbibliographies using a different scheme (\eg author-title or author-year).
+This option applies to numerical citation\slash bibliography styles only and requires that the \opt{defernumbers} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} be enabled globally. If enabled, \biblatex will not assign a numerical label to the entries in the respective bibliography. This is useful when mixing a numerical subbibliography with one or more subbibliographies using a different scheme (\eg author-title or author-year).
 
 \end{optionlist*}
 
@@ -3148,6 +3168,8 @@ This command prints a bibliography heading defined with \cmd{defbibheading}. It
 \subsubsection{The List of Shorthands}
 \label{use:bib:los}
 
+\BibTeXOnlyMark This section applies only to \bibtex. When using \biber, the list of shorthands is just a special case of a bibliography list. See \secref{use:bib:biblist}.
+
 If any entry includes a \bibfield{shorthand} field, \sty{biblatex} automatically builds a list of shorthands which may be printed in addition to the regular bibliography. The following command prints the list of shorthands.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
@@ -3160,16 +3182,80 @@ The \opt{sorting} option differs from \cmd{printbibliography} in that if omitted
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
+\subsubsection{Bibliography Lists}
+\label{use:bib:biblist}
+
+\BiberOnlyMark This section applies only to \biber. It is a generalisation of the shorthands facility available in earlier versions and with \bibtex. When using \bibtex as the backend, please refer to section \secref{use:bib:los}.
+
+\biblatex can, in addition to printing normal bibliographies, also print arbitrary lists of information derived from the bibliography data such as a list of shorthand abbreviations for particular entries or a list of abbreviations of journal titles.
+
+A bibliography list differs from a normal bibliography in that the same bibliography driver is used to print all entries rather than a specific driver being used for each entry depending on the entry type.
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+
+\cmditem{printbiblist}[key=value, \dots]{<biblistname>}
+
+This command prints a bibliography list. It takes an optional argument, which is a list of options given in \keyval notation. Valid options are all options supported by \cmd{printbibliography} (\secref{use:bib:bib}) except \opt{prefixnumbers}, \opt{resetnumbers}, and \opt{omitnumbers}. If there are any \env{refsection} environments in the document, the bibliography list will be local to these environments; see \secref{use:bib:sec} for details. By default, this command uses the heading \texttt{biblist}. See \secref{use:bib:hdg} for details.
+
+The \prm{biblistname} is a mandatory argument which names the bibliography list. This name is used to identify:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The bibliography driver used to print the list entries
+\item A filter declared with \cmd{DeclareBiblistFilter} used to filter the entries returned from \biber
+\item The default bib environment to use
+\item The default sorting scheme name to use if the \opt{sorting} option is not set
+\end{itemize}
+
+Note that the \opt{sorting} option differs from \cmd{printbibliography} in that if omitted, the default is to sort use the sorting scheme named after the bibliography list and only then to fall back to the global sorting scheme is this is not defined.
+
+The most common bibliography list is a list of shorthand abbreviations for certain entries and so this has a convenience alias \cmd{printshorthands[\dots]} for backwards compatibility which is defined as:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\printbiblist[...]{shorthand}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\biblatex provides automatic support for data source fields in the default data model marked as <Label fields> (See \secref{bib:fld:dat}). Such fields automatically have defined for them:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item A default bib environment (See \secref{use:bib:hdg})
+\item A bibliography list filter (See \secref{aut:ctm:bibfilt})
+\item Some supporting formats and lengths (See \secref{aut:fmt:ilc} and \secref{aut:fmt:ich})
+\end{itemize}
+%
+Therefore only a minimal setup is required to print bibliography lists with such fields. For example, to print a list of journal title abbreviations, you can minimally put this in your preamble:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shortjournal}{%
+  \printfield{journaltitle}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Then you can put this in your document where you want to print the list:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\printbiblist[title={Journal Shorthands}]{shortjournal}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Since \bibfield{shortjournal} is defined in the default data model as a <Label field>, this example:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Uses the automatically created <shortjournal> bib environment
+\item Uses the automatically created <shortjournal> bibliography list filter to return only entries with a \bibfield{shortjournal} field in the \file{.bbl}
+\item Uses the defined <shortjournal> bibliography driver to print the entries
+\item Uses the default <biblist> heading but overrides the title with <Journal Shorthands>
+\item Uses the global sorting scheme since no \opt{sorting} option is passed to \cmd{printbiblist} and no scheme exists with the name \bibfield{shortjournal}
+\end{itemize}
+%
+Naturally all defaults can be overridden by options to \cmd{printbiblist} and definitions of the environments, filters etc. and in this way arbitrary types of bibliography lists can be printed containing a variety of information from the bibliography data.
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
 \subsubsection{Bibliography Sections}
 \label{use:bib:sec}
 
-The \env{refsection} environment is used in the document body to mark a reference section. This environment is useful if you want separate, independent bibliographies and lists of shorthands in each chapter, section, or any other part of a document. Within a reference section, all cited works are assigned labels which are local to the environment. Technically, reference sections are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will most likely be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
+The \env{refsection} environment is used in the document body to mark a reference section. This environment is useful if you want separate, independent bibliographies and bibliography lists in each chapter, section, or any other part of a document. Within a reference section, all cited works are assigned labels which are local to the environment. Technically, reference sections are completely independent from document divisions such as \cmd{chapter} and \cmd{section} even though they will most likely be used per chapter or section. See the \opt{refsection} package option in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen} for a way to automate this. Also see \secref{use:use:mlt} for usage examples.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \envitem{refsection}[resource, \dots]
 
-The optional argument is a comma"=separated list of resources specific to the reference section. If the argument is omitted, the reference section will use the default resource list, as specified with \cmd{addbibresource} in the preamble. If the argument is provided, it replaces the default resource list. Global resources specified with \cmd{addglobalbib} are always considered. \env{refsection} environments may not be nested, but you may use \env{refsegment} environments within a \env{refsection} to subdivide it into segments. Use the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a section when printing the bibliography, and the corresponding option of \cmd{printshorthands} when printing the list of shorthands. Bibliography sections are numbered starting at~\texttt{1}. The number of the current section is also written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsection} environment are assigned to section~0. If \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsection}, it will automatically select the current section. The \opt{section} option is not required in this case. This also applies to \cmd{printshorthands}.
+The optional argument is a comma"=separated list of resources specific to the reference section. If the argument is omitted, the reference section will use the default resource list, as specified with \cmd{addbibresource} in the preamble. If the argument is provided, it replaces the default resource list. Global resources specified with \cmd{addglobalbib} are always considered. \env{refsection} environments may not be nested, but you may use \env{refsegment} environments within a \env{refsection} to subdivide it into segments. Use the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography} to select a section when printing the bibliography, and the corresponding option of \cmd{printbiblist} when printing bibliography lists. Bibliography sections are numbered starting at~\texttt{1}. The number of the current section is also written to the transcript file. All citations given outside a \env{refsection} environment are assigned to section~0. If \cmd{printbibliography} is used within a \env{refsection}, it will automatically select the current section. The \opt{section} option is not required in this case. This also applies to \cmd{printbiblist}.
 
 \cmditem{newrefsection}[resource, \dots]
 
@@ -3219,7 +3305,7 @@ Assigns a \prm{key} to a \prm{category}, to be used in conjunction with the \opt
 
 \cmditem{defbibenvironment}{name}{begin code}{end code}{item code}
 
-This command defines bibliography environments. The \prm{name} is an identifier passed to the \opt{env} option of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printshorthands} when selecting the environment. The \prm{begin code} is \latex code to be executed at the beginning of the environment; the \prm{end code} is executed at the end of the environment; the \prm{item code} is code to be executed at the beginning of each entry in the bibliography or the list of shorthands. Here is an example of a definition based on the standard \latex \env{list} environment:
+This command defines bibliography environments. The \prm{name} is an identifier passed to the \opt{env} option of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printbiblist} when selecting the environment. The \prm{begin code} is \latex code to be executed at the beginning of the environment; the \prm{end code} is executed at the end of the environment; the \prm{item code} is code to be executed at the beginning of each entry in the bibliography or a bibliography list. Here is an example of a definition based on the standard \latex \env{list} environment:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \defbibenvironment{bibliography}
@@ -3236,7 +3322,7 @@ As seen in the above example, usage of \cmd{defbibenvironment} is roughly simila
 
 \cmditem{defbibheading}{name}[title]{code}
 
-This command defines bibliography headings. The \prm{name} is an identifier to be passed to the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography} or \cmd{printbibheading} and \cmd{printshorthands} when selecting the heading. The \prm{code} should be \latex code generating a fully"=fledged heading, including page headers and an entry in the table of contents, if desired. If \cmd{printbibliography} or \cmd{printshorthands} are invoked with a \opt{title} option, the title will be passed to the heading definition as |#1|. If not, the default title specified by the optional \prm{title} argument is passed as |#1| instead. The \prm{title} argument will typically be \cmd{bibname}, \cmd{refname}, or \cmd{losname} (see \secref{aut:lng:key:bhd}). This command is often needed when after changes to document headers in the preamble. Here is an example of a simple heading definition:
+This command defines bibliography headings. The \prm{name} is an identifier to be passed to the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography} or \cmd{printbibheading} and \cmd{printbiblist} when selecting the heading. The \prm{code} should be \latex code generating a fully"=fledged heading, including page headers and an entry in the table of contents, if desired. If \cmd{printbibliography} or \cmd{printbiblist} are invoked with a \opt{title} option, the title will be passed to the heading definition as |#1|. If not, the default title specified by the optional \prm{title} argument is passed as |#1| instead. The \prm{title} argument will typically be \cmd{bibname}, \cmd{refname}, or \cmd{biblistname} (see \secref{aut:lng:key:bhd}). This command is often needed after changes to document headers in the preamble. Here is an example of a simple heading definition:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \defbibheading{bibliography}[\bibname]{%
@@ -3273,18 +3359,18 @@ A blank heading definition. Use this to suppress the heading.
 
 \end{valuelist*}
 
-The following headings intended for use with \cmd{printshorthands} are predefined:
+The following headings intended for use with \cmd{printbiblist} are predefined:
 
 \begin{valuelist*}
 
-\item[shorthands]
-This is the default heading used by \cmd{printshorthands} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. It is similar to \texttt{bibliography} above except that it uses the localization string \texttt{shorthands} instead of \texttt{bibliography} or \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
+\item[biblist]
+This is the default heading used by \cmd{printbiblist} if the \opt{heading} option is not given. It is similar to \texttt{bibliography} above except that it uses the localization string \texttt{shorthands} instead of \texttt{bibliography} or \texttt{references} (see \secref{aut:lng:key}). See also \secref{use:cav:scr, use:cav:mem} for class-specific hints.
 
-\item[losintoc]
-Similar to \texttt{shorthands} above but adds an entry to the table of contents.
+\item[biblistintoc]
+Similar to \texttt{biblist} above but adds an entry to the table of contents.
 
-\item[losnumbered]
-Similar to \texttt{shorthands} above but uses \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section} to create a numbered heading which is also added to the table of contents.
+\item[biblistnumbered]
+Similar to \texttt{biblist} above but uses \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section} to create a numbered heading which is also added to the table of contents.
 
 \end{valuelist*}
 
@@ -3295,7 +3381,7 @@ Similar to \texttt{shorthands} above but uses \cmd{chapter} or \cmd{section} to
 
 \cmditem{defbibnote}{name}{text}
 
-Defines the bibliography note \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printshorthands}. The \prm{text} may be any arbitrary piece of text, possibly spanning several paragraphs and containing font declarations. Also see \secref{use:cav:act}.
+Defines the bibliography note \prm{name}, to be used via the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{printbiblist}. The \prm{text} may be any arbitrary piece of text, possibly spanning several paragraphs and containing font declarations. Also see \secref{use:cav:act}.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3344,7 +3430,7 @@ Here is an example of a filter expression:
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-This filter will match all entries whose entry type is either \bibtype{book} or \bibtype{inbook} and whose \bibfield{keywords} field includes the keyword <\texttt{abc}> but not <\texttt{x y z}>. As seen in the above example, all elements are separated by whitespace (spaces, tabs, or line endings). There is no spacing around the equal sign. The logical operators are evaluated with the \cmd{ifboolexpr} command from the \sty{etoolbox} package. See the \sty{etoolbox} manual for details about the syntax. The syntax of the \cmd{ifthenelse} command from the \sty{ifthen} package, which has been employed in older versions of \sty{biblatex}, is still supported. This is the same test using \sty{ifthen}-like syntax:
+This filter will match all entries whose entry type is either \bibtype{book} or \bibtype{inbook} and whose \bibfield{keywords} field includes the keyword <\texttt{abc}> but not <\texttt{x y z}>. As seen in the above example, all elements are separated by whitespace (spaces, tabs, or line endings). There is no spacing around the equal sign. The logical operators are evaluated with the \cmd{ifboolexpr} command from the \sty{etoolbox} package. See the \sty{etoolbox} manual for details about the syntax. The syntax of the \cmd{ifthenelse} command from the \sty{ifthen} package, which has been employed in older versions of \biblatex, is still supported. This is the same test using \sty{ifthen}-like syntax:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=ifthen,morekeywords={\\type,\\keyword}]{}
 \defbibfilter{example}{%
@@ -3387,7 +3473,7 @@ See the author guide, in particular \secref{aut:aux:tst,aut:aux:ife}, for furthe
 \subsubsection{Dynamic Entry Sets}
 \label{use:bib:set}
 
-In addition to the \bibtype{set} entry type, \sty{biblatex} also supports dynamic entry sets defined on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis. The following command, which may be used in the document preamble or the document body, defines the set \prm{key}:
+In addition to the \bibtype{set} entry type, \biblatex also supports dynamic entry sets defined on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis. The following command, which may be used in the document preamble or the document body, defines the set \prm{key}:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3557,7 +3643,7 @@ This is the multicite version of \cmd{autocite}. It also detects and moves punct
 \subsubsection{Text Commands}
 \label{use:cit:txt}
 
-The following commands are provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}. They are intended for use in the flow of text. Note that all text commands are excluded from citation tracking.
+The following commands are provided by the core of \biblatex. They are intended for use in the flow of text. Note that all text commands are excluded from citation tracking.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3601,7 +3687,7 @@ This command wraps the \prm{text} in context sensitive brackets.
 \subsubsection{Special Commands}
 \label{use:cit:spc}
 
-The following special commands are also provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}.
+The following special commands are also provided by the core of \biblatex.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3681,7 +3767,7 @@ The multicite version of \cmd{avolcite} and \cmd{Avolcite}, respectively.
 \cmditem{notecite}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 \cmditem{Notecite}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 
-These commands print the \prm{prenote} and \prm{postnote} arguments but no citation. Instead, a \cmd{nocite} command is issued for every \prm{key}. This may be useful for authors who incorporate implicit citations in their writing, only giving information not mentioned before in the running text, but who still want to take advantage of the automatic \prm{postnote} formatting and the implicit \cmd{nocite} function. This is a generic, style"=independent citation command. Special citation styles may provide smarter facilities for the same purpose. The capitalized version forces capitalization (note that this is only applicable if the note starts with a command which is sensitive to \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker).
+These commands print the \prm{prenote} and \prm{postnote} arguments but no citation. Instead, a \cmd{nocite} command is issued for every \prm{key}. This may be useful for authors who incorporate implicit citations in their writing, only giving information not mentioned before in the running text, but who still want to take advantage of the automatic \prm{postnote} formatting and the implicit \cmd{nocite} function. This is a generic, style"=independent citation command. Special citation styles may provide smarter facilities for the same purpose. The capitalized version forces capitalization (note that this is only applicable if the note starts with a command which is sensitive to \biblatex's punctuation tracker).
 
 \cmditem{pnotecite}[prenote][postnote]{key}
 \cmditem{Pnotecite}[prenote][postnote]{key}
@@ -3697,7 +3783,7 @@ Similar to \cmd{notecite} but the notes are printed in a footnote.
 \subsubsection{Low-level Commands}
 \label{use:cit:low}
 
-The following commands are also provided by the core of \sty{biblatex}. They grant access to all lists and fields at a lower level.
+The following commands are also provided by the core of \biblatex. They grant access to all lists and fields at a lower level.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3767,7 +3853,7 @@ Similar to \cmd{RN} but prints a lowercase Roman numeral. The formatting applied
 \subsubsection{\sty{natbib} Compatibility Commands}
 \label{use:cit:nat}
 
-The \opt{natbib} package option loads a \sty{natbib} compatibility module. The module defines aliases for the citation commands provided by the \sty{natbib} package. This includes aliases for the core citation commands \cmd{citet} and \cmd{citep} as well as the variants \cmd{citealt} and \cmd{citealp}. The starred variants of these commands, which print the full author list, are also supported. The \cmd{cite} command, which is handled in a particular way by \sty{natbib}, is not treated in a special way. The text commands (\cmd{citeauthor}, \cmd{citeyear}, etc.) are also supported, as are all commands which capitalize the name prefix (\cmd{Citet}, \cmd{Citep}, \cmd{Citeauthor}, etc.). Aliasing with \cmd{defcitealias}, \cmd{citetalias}, and \cmd{citepalias} is possible as well. Note that the compatibility commands will not emulate the citation format of the \sty{natbib} package. They merely alias \sty{natbib}'s commands to functionally equivalent facilities of the \sty{biblatex} package. The citation format depends on the main citation style. However, the compatibility style will adapt \cmd{nameyeardelim} to match the default style of the \sty{natbib} package.
+The \opt{natbib} package option loads a \sty{natbib} compatibility module. The module defines aliases for the citation commands provided by the \sty{natbib} package. This includes aliases for the core citation commands \cmd{citet} and \cmd{citep} as well as the variants \cmd{citealt} and \cmd{citealp}. The starred variants of these commands, which print the full author list, are also supported. The \cmd{cite} command, which is handled in a particular way by \sty{natbib}, is not treated in a special way. The text commands (\cmd{citeauthor}, \cmd{citeyear}, etc.) are also supported, as are all commands which capitalize the name prefix (\cmd{Citet}, \cmd{Citep}, \cmd{Citeauthor}, etc.). Aliasing with \cmd{defcitealias}, \cmd{citetalias}, and \cmd{citepalias} is possible as well. Note that the compatibility commands will not emulate the citation format of the \sty{natbib} package. They merely alias \sty{natbib}'s commands to functionally equivalent facilities of the \biblatex package. The citation format depends on the main citation style. However, the compatibility style will adapt \cmd{nameyeardelim} to match the default style of the \sty{natbib} package.
 
 \subsubsection[\sty{mcite}-like Citation Commands]{\sty{mcite}-like Citation Commands\BiberOnlyMark}
 \label{use:cit:mct}
@@ -3799,7 +3885,7 @@ will execute:
 \cite*[pre][post]{setA}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Note that the \texttt{mcite} module is not a compatibility module. It provides commands which are very similar but not identical in syntax and function to \sty{mcite}'s commands. When migrating from \sty{mcite}\slash\sty{mciteplus} to \sty{biblatex}, legacy files must be updated. With \sty{mcite}, the first member of the citation group is also the identifier of the group as a whole. Borrowing an example from the \sty{mcite} manual, this group:
+Note that the \texttt{mcite} module is not a compatibility module. It provides commands which are very similar but not identical in syntax and function to \sty{mcite}'s commands. When migrating from \sty{mcite}\slash\sty{mciteplus} to \biblatex, legacy files must be updated. With \sty{mcite}, the first member of the citation group is also the identifier of the group as a whole. Borrowing an example from the \sty{mcite} manual, this group:
 
 \begin{table}
 \tablesetup
@@ -3827,7 +3913,7 @@ Note that the \texttt{mcite} module is not a compatibility module. It provides c
 \cite{<<glashow>>,*salam,*weinberg}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-consists of three entries and the entry key of the first one also serves as identifier of the entire group. In contrast to that, a \sty{biblatex} entry set is an entity in its own right. Therefore, it requires a unique entry key which is assigned to the set as it is defined:
+consists of three entries and the entry key of the first one also serves as identifier of the entire group. In contrast to that, a \biblatex entry set is an entity in its own right. Therefore, it requires a unique entry key which is assigned to the set as it is defined:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \mcite{<<set1>>,*glashow,*salam,*weinberg}
@@ -3859,7 +3945,7 @@ Once defined, an entry set is handled like any regular entry in a \file{bib} fil
 \subsection{Localization Commands}
 \label{use:lng}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides translations for key terms such as <edition> or <volume> as well as definitions for language specific features such as the date format and ordinals. These definitions, which are loaded automatically, may be modified or extended in the document preamble or the configuration file with the commands introduced in this section.
+The \biblatex package provides translations for key terms such as <edition> or <volume> as well as definitions for language specific features such as the date format and ordinals. These definitions, which are loaded automatically, may be modified or extended in the document preamble or the configuration file with the commands introduced in this section.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -3876,7 +3962,7 @@ This command is used to define localization strings. The \prm{language} must be
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-A complete list of all keys supported by default is given is \secref{aut:lng:key}. Note that all expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. The \sty{biblatex} package will automatically capitalize the first word when required at the beginning of a sentence. Expressions intended for use in headings should be capitalized in a way that is suitable for titling. In contrast to \cmd{DeclareBibliographyStrings}, \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings} overrides both the full and the abbreviated version of the string. See \secref{aut:lng:cmd} for further details.
+A complete list of all keys supported by default is given is \secref{aut:lng:key}. Note that all expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. The \biblatex package will automatically capitalize the first word when required at the beginning of a sentence. Expressions intended for use in headings should be capitalized in a way that is suitable for titling. In contrast to \cmd{DeclareBibliographyStrings}, \cmd{DefineBibliographyStrings} overrides both the full and the abbreviated version of the string. See \secref{aut:lng:cmd} for further details.
 
 \cmditem{DefineBibliographyExtras}{language}{code}
 
@@ -3935,13 +4021,13 @@ The separator inserted between <units> in the sense explained in \secref{aut:pct
 \csitem{finentrypunct}
 The punctuation printed at the very end of every bibliography entry, usually a period. The default definition is a period.
 
-\csitem{entrysetpunct}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{entrysetpunct}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The punctuation printed between bibliography subentries of an entry set. The default definition is a semicolon and a space.
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelima}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibnamedelima}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This delimiter controls the spacing between the elements which make up a name part. It is inserted automatically after the first name element if the element is less than three characters long and before the last element. The default definition is an interword space penalized by the value of the \cnt{highnamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelimb}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibnamedelimb}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This delimiter is inserted between the elements which make up a name part where \cmd{bibnamedelima} does not apply. The default definition is an interword space penalized by the value of the \cnt{lownamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
 \csitem{bibnamedelimc}
@@ -3950,16 +4036,16 @@ This delimiter controls the spacing between name parts. It is inserted between t
 \csitem{bibnamedelimd}
 This delimiter is inserted between all name parts where \cmd{bibnamedelimc} does not apply. The default definition is an interword space penalized by the value of the \cnt{lownamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelimi}\BiberOnlyMark
-This delimiter replaces \cmd{bibnamedelima/b} after initials. Note that this only applies to initials given as such in the \file{bib} file, not to the initials automatically generated by \sty{biblatex} which use their own set of delimiters.
+\csitem{bibnamedelimi}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+This delimiter replaces \cmd{bibnamedelima/b} after initials. Note that this only applies to initials given as such in the \file{bib} file, not to the initials automatically generated by \biblatex which use their own set of delimiters.
 
-\csitem{bibinitperiod}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinitperiod}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The punctuation inserted after initials unless \cmd{bibinithyphendelim} applies. The default definition is a period (\cmd{adddot}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibinitdelim}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinitdelim}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The spacing inserted between multiple initials unless \cmd{bibinithyphendelim} applies. The default definition is an unbreakable interword space. Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibinithyphendelim}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinithyphendelim}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The punctuation inserted between the initials of hyphenated name parts, replacing \cmd{bibinitperiod} and \cmd{bibinitdelim}. The default definition is a period followed by an unbreakable hyphen. Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
 \csitem{bibindexnamedelima}
@@ -4068,7 +4154,7 @@ The delimiter printed between the author\slash editor and the year by author-yea
 \csitem{labelalphaothers}
 A string to be appended to the non"=numeric portion of the \bibfield{labelalpha} field (\ie the field holding the citation label used by alphabetic citation styles) if the number of authors\slash editors exceeds the \opt{maxalphanames} threshold or the \bibfield{author}\slash \bibfield{editor} list was truncated in the \file{bib} file with the keyword <\texttt{and others}>. This will typically be a single character such as a plus sign or an asterisk. The default is a plus sign. This command may also be redefined to an empty string to disable this feature. In any case, it must be redefined in the preamble.
 
-\csitem{sortalphaothers}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{sortalphaothers}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 Similar to \cmd{labelalphaothers} but used in the sorting process. Setting it to a different value is advisable if the latter contains formatting commands, for example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
@@ -4129,7 +4215,7 @@ The commands in this section are language specific. When redefining them, you ne
 
 The language specific dash to be used for ranges of numbers.
 
-\csitem{bibrangessep}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibrangessep}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
 The language specific separator to be used between multiple ranges.
 
@@ -4281,7 +4367,7 @@ Generic command which typesets an acronym using the small caps variant of the cu
 
 \cmditem{autocap}{character}
 
-Automatically converts the \prm{character} to its uppercase form if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location. This command is robust. It is useful for conditional capitalization of certain strings in an entry. Note that the \prm{character} argument is a single character given in lowercase. For example:
+Automatically converts the \prm{character} to its uppercase form if \biblatex's punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location. This command is robust. It is useful for conditional capitalization of certain strings in an entry. Note that the \prm{character} argument is a single character given in lowercase. For example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \autocap{s}pecial issue
@@ -4336,7 +4422,7 @@ This counter controls the behavior of the internal <smart and> command. When set
 
 \csitem{forceE}
 
-Use this command in \file{bib} files if \sty{biblatex} gets the <and> before a certain name wrong. As its name suggests, it will enforce <e>. This command must be used in a special way to prevent confusing \bibtex. Here is an example:
+Use this command in \file{bib} files if \biblatex gets the <and> before a certain name wrong. As its name suggests, it will enforce <e>. This command must be used in a special way to prevent confusing \bibtex. Here is an example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 author = {Edward Jones and Eoin Maguire},
@@ -4354,7 +4440,7 @@ Similar to \cmd{forceE} but enforces <y>.
 \subsubsection{Greek}
 \label{use:loc:grk}
 
-The Greek localization module requires \utf support. It will not work with any other encoding. Generally speaking, the \sty{biblatex} package is compatible with the \sty{inputenc} package and with \xelatex. The \sty{ucs} package will not work. Since \sty{inputenc}'s standard \file{utf8} module is missing glyph mappings for Greek, this leaves Greek users with \xelatex. Note that you may need to load additional packages which set up Greek fonts. As a rule of thumb, a setup which works for regular Greek documents should also work with \sty{biblatex}. However, there is one fundamental limitation. As of this writing, \sty{biblatex} has no support for switching scripts. Greek titles in the bibliography should work fine, provided that you use \biber as a backend, but English and other titles in the bibliography may be rendered in Greek letters. If you need multi-script bibliographies, using \xelatex is the only sensible choice.
+The Greek localization module requires \utf support. It will not work with any other encoding. Generally speaking, the \biblatex package is compatible with the \sty{inputenc} package and with \xelatex. The \sty{ucs} package will not work. Since \sty{inputenc}'s standard \file{utf8} module is missing glyph mappings for Greek, this leaves Greek users with \xelatex. Note that you may need to load additional packages which set up Greek fonts. As a rule of thumb, a setup which works for regular Greek documents should also work with \biblatex. However, there is one fundamental limitation. As of this writing, \biblatex has no support for switching scripts. Greek titles in the bibliography should work fine, provided that you use \biber as a backend, but English and other titles in the bibliography may be rendered in Greek letters. If you need multi-script bibliographies, using \xelatex is the only sensible choice.
 
 \subsubsection{Russian}
 \label{use:loc:rus}
@@ -4364,12 +4450,12 @@ Like the Greek localization module, the Russian module also requires \utf suppor
 \subsection{Usage Notes}
 \label{use:use}
 
-The following sections give a basic overview of the \sty{biblatex} package and discuss some typical usage scenarios.
+The following sections give a basic overview of the \biblatex package and discuss some typical usage scenarios.
 
 \subsubsection{Overview}
 \label{use:use:int}
 
-Using the \sty{biblatex} package is slightly different from using traditional \bibtex styles and related packages. Before we get to specific usage scenarios, we will therefore have a look at the structure of a typical document first:
+Using the \biblatex package is slightly different from using traditional \bibtex styles and related packages. Before we get to specific usage scenarios, we will therefore have a look at the structure of a typical document first:
 
 \begin{ltxexample}
 \documentclass{...}
@@ -4382,15 +4468,15 @@ Using the \sty{biblatex} package is slightly different from using traditional \b
 \end{document}
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-With traditional \bibtex, the \cmd{bibliography} command serves two purposes. It marks the location of the bibliography and it also specifies the \file{bib} file(s). The file extension is omitted. With \sty{biblatex}, resources are specified in the preamble with  \cmd{addbibresource} using the full name with \file{.bib} suffix. The bibliography is printed using the \cmd{printbibliography} command which may be used multiple times (see \secref{use:bib} for details). The document body may contain any number of citation commands (\secref{use:cit}). Processing this example file requires that a certain procedure be followed. Suppose our example file is called \path{example.tex} and our bibliographic data is in \path{bibfile.bib}. The procedure, then, is as follows:
+With traditional \bibtex, the \cmd{bibliography} command serves two purposes. It marks the location of the bibliography and it also specifies the \file{bib} file(s). The file extension is omitted. With \biblatex, resources are specified in the preamble with  \cmd{addbibresource} using the full name with \file{.bib} suffix. The bibliography is printed using the \cmd{printbibliography} command which may be used multiple times (see \secref{use:bib} for details). The document body may contain any number of citation commands (\secref{use:cit}). Processing this example file requires that a certain procedure be followed. Suppose our example file is called \path{example.tex} and our bibliographic data is in \path{bibfile.bib}. The procedure, then, is as follows:
 
 \paragraph{\biber}
 
 \begin{enumerate}
 
-\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. If the file contains any citations, \sty{biblatex} will request the respective data from \biber by writing commands to the auxiliary file \path{example.bcf}.
-\item Run \bin{biber} on \path{example.bcf}. \biber will retrieve the data from \path{bibfile.bib} and write it to the auxiliary file \path{example.bbl} in a format which can be processed by \sty{biblatex}.
-\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. \sty{biblatex} will read the data from \path{example.bbl} and print all citations as well as the bibliography.
+\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. If the file contains any citations, \biblatex will request the respective data from \biber by writing commands to the auxiliary file \path{example.bcf}.
+\item Run \bin{biber} on \path{example.bcf}. \biber will retrieve the data from \path{bibfile.bib} and write it to the auxiliary file \path{example.bbl} in a format which can be processed by \biblatex.
+\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. \biblatex will read the data from \path{example.bbl} and print all citations as well as the bibliography.
 
 \end{enumerate}
 
@@ -4398,26 +4484,26 @@ With traditional \bibtex, the \cmd{bibliography} command serves two purposes. It
 
 \begin{enumerate}
 
-\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. If the file contains any citations, \sty{biblatex} will request the respective data from \bibtex by writing commands to the auxiliary file \path{example.aux}.
-\item Run \bin{bibtex} on \path{example.aux}. \bibtex will retrieve the data from \path{bibfile.bib} and write it to the auxiliary file \path{example.bbl} in a format which can be processed by \sty{biblatex}.
-\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. \sty{biblatex} will read the data from \path{example.bbl} and print all citations as well as the bibliography.
+\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. If the file contains any citations, \biblatex will request the respective data from \bibtex by writing commands to the auxiliary file \path{example.aux}.
+\item Run \bin{bibtex} on \path{example.aux}. \bibtex will retrieve the data from \path{bibfile.bib} and write it to the auxiliary file \path{example.bbl} in a format which can be processed by \biblatex.
+\item Run \bin{latex} on \path{example.tex}. \biblatex will read the data from \path{example.bbl} and print all citations as well as the bibliography.
 
 \end{enumerate}
 
 Whenever a reference to a work which has not been cited before is added, this procedure must be repeated. This is also the case if the last reference to a work which has been cited before is removed because some citation labels may change in this case. In contrast to traditional \bibtex, there is normally no need to run \bin{latex} twice after running the backend as far as the handling of bibliographic data is concerned.\footnote{That is, unless the \opt{defernumbers} package option is enabled. See \secref{aut:int}}
 
-\BibTeXOnlyMark Note that when using \bibtex as the backend this only applies to the most basic case. Using the \bibfield{xref} field or the \bibfield{entryset} field may require an additional \latex/\bibtex/\latex cycle. Some other facilities provided by \sty{biblatex} may also require an additional \bin{latex} run to get certain references and the page tracking right. In this case, the usual warning messages such as «There were undefined references» and «Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right» will be printed.
+\BibTeXOnlyMark Note that when using \bibtex as the backend this only applies to the most basic case. Using the \bibfield{xref} field or the \bibfield{entryset} field may require an additional \latex/\bibtex/\latex cycle. Some other facilities provided by \biblatex may also require an additional \bin{latex} run to get certain references and the page tracking right. In this case, the usual warning messages such as «There were undefined references» and «Label(s) may have changed. Rerun to get cross-references right» will be printed.
 
 \subsubsection{Auxiliary Files}
 \label{use:use:aux}
 
 \paragraph{\biber}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package uses one auxiliary \file{bcf} file only. Even if there are citation commands in a file included via \cmd{include}, you only need to run \biber on the main \file{bcf} file. All information \biber needs is in the \file{bcf} file, including information about all refsections if using multiple \env{refsection} environments (see \secref{use:use:mlt}).
+The \biblatex package uses one auxiliary \file{bcf} file only. Even if there are citation commands in a file included via \cmd{include}, you only need to run \biber on the main \file{bcf} file. All information \biber needs is in the \file{bcf} file, including information about all refsections if using multiple \env{refsection} environments (see \secref{use:use:mlt}).
 
 \paragraph{\bibtex}
 
-By default, the \sty{biblatex} package uses the main \file{aux} file only. Even if there are citation commands in a file included via \cmd{include}, which has its own \file{aux} file, you only need to run \bibtex on the main \file{aux} file. If you are using \env{refsection} environments in a document (see \secref{use:use:mlt}) \sty{biblatex} will create one additional \file{aux} file for every \env{refsection} environment. In this case, you also need to run \bin{bibtex} on each additional \file{aux} file. The name of the additional \file{aux} files is the base name of the main input file with the string \file{-blx} and a running number appended at the end. The \sty{biblatex} package issues a warning listing the files which require an additional \bibtex run. With the basic example presented in \secref{use:use:int}, it would issue the following warning:
+By default, the \biblatex package uses the main \file{aux} file only. Even if there are citation commands in a file included via \cmd{include}, which has its own \file{aux} file, you only need to run \bibtex on the main \file{aux} file. If you are using \env{refsection} environments in a document (see \secref{use:use:mlt}) \biblatex will create one additional \file{aux} file for every \env{refsection} environment. In this case, you also need to run \bin{bibtex} on each additional \file{aux} file. The name of the additional \file{aux} files is the base name of the main input file with the string \file{-blx} and a running number appended at the end. The \biblatex package issues a warning listing the files which require an additional \bibtex run. With the basic example presented in \secref{use:use:int}, it would issue the following warning:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=plain]
 Package biblatex Warning: Please (re)run BibTeX on the file(s):
@@ -4435,16 +4521,16 @@ Package biblatex Warning: Please (re)run BibTeX on the file(s):
 (biblatex)                and rerun LaTeX afterwards.
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Apart from these \file{aux} files, \sty{biblatex} uses an additional \file{bib} file with the same suffix to pass certain control parameters to \bibtex. In the example above, this file would be named \path{example-blx.bib}. In the event of a file name conflict, you can change the suffix by redefining the macro \cmd{blxauxsuffix} in the document preamble. When using \biber, \sty{biblatex} writes a control file named \path{example.bcf} and ignores \cmd{blxauxsuffix}. There is also no auxiliary \file{bib} file in this case.
+Apart from these \file{aux} files, \biblatex uses an additional \file{bib} file with the same suffix to pass certain control parameters to \bibtex. In the example above, this file would be named \path{example-blx.bib}. In the event of a file name conflict, you can change the suffix by redefining the macro \cmd{blxauxsuffix} in the document preamble. When using \biber, \biblatex writes a control file named \path{example.bcf} and ignores \cmd{blxauxsuffix}. There is also no auxiliary \file{bib} file in this case.
 
-Note that \sty{biblatex} will not overwrite any files it did not create. All auxiliary files created automatically by this package start with a special signature line. Before overwriting a file (excluding the main \file{aux} file, which is managed by \latex), \sty{biblatex} inspects the first line of the file to make sure that there is no file name conflict. If the file in question is missing the signature line, \sty{biblatex} will immediately issue an error message and abort before opening the output stream. In this case you should delete any spurious files accidentally left in the working directory. If the error persists, there may be a file name conflict with a file found in one of the \tex installation trees. Since the installation trees usually do not contain any \file{aux} files and the string \file{-blx} is fairly exotic in the name of a \file{bib} file, this is rather unlikely but theoretically possible. If you find out that this is indeed the case, you should redefine \cmd{blxauxsuffix} permanently in the \sty{biblatex} configuration file, \path{biblatex.cfg.}
+Note that \biblatex will not overwrite any files it did not create. All auxiliary files created automatically by this package start with a special signature line. Before overwriting a file (excluding the main \file{aux} file, which is managed by \latex), \biblatex inspects the first line of the file to make sure that there is no file name conflict. If the file in question is missing the signature line, \biblatex will immediately issue an error message and abort before opening the output stream. In this case you should delete any spurious files accidentally left in the working directory. If the error persists, there may be a file name conflict with a file found in one of the \tex installation trees. Since the installation trees usually do not contain any \file{aux} files and the string \file{-blx} is fairly exotic in the name of a \file{bib} file, this is rather unlikely but theoretically possible. If you find out that this is indeed the case, you should redefine \cmd{blxauxsuffix} permanently in the \biblatex configuration file, \path{biblatex.cfg.}
 
 \subsubsection{Multiple Bibliographies}
 \label{use:use:mlt}
 
 In a collection of articles by different authors, such as a conference proceedings volume for example, it is very common to have one bibliography for each article rather than a global one for the entire book. In the example below, each article would be presented as a separate \cmd{chapter} with its own bibliography.
 
-\BibTeXOnlyMark Note that with the \bibtex backend, \sty{biblatex} creates one additional \file{aux} file for every \env{refsection} environment. These files have to be processed by \bibtex as well, see \secref{use:use:aux} for details.
+\BibTeXOnlyMark Note that with the \bibtex backend, \biblatex creates one additional \file{aux} file for every \env{refsection} environment. These files have to be processed by \bibtex as well, see \secref{use:use:aux} for details.
 
 \begin{ltxexample}
 \documentclass{...}
@@ -4487,7 +4573,7 @@ If \cmd{printbibliography} is used inside a \env{refsection} environment, it aut
 \end{document}
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-Note the definition of the bibliography heading in the above example. This is the definition taking care of the subheadings in the bibliography. The main heading is generated with a plain \cmd{chapter} command in this case. The \sty{biblatex} package automatically sets a label at the beginning of every \env{refsection} environment, using the standard \cmd{label} command. The identifier used is the string \texttt{refsection:} followed by the number of the respective \env{refsection} environment. The number of the current section is accessible via the \cnt{refsection} counter. When using the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography}, this counter is also set locally. This means that you may use the counter in heading definitions to print subheadings like «References for Chapter 3», as shown above. You could also use the title of the respective chapter as a subheading by loading the \sty{nameref} package and using \cmd{nameref} instead of \cmd{ref}:
+Note the definition of the bibliography heading in the above example. This is the definition taking care of the subheadings in the bibliography. The main heading is generated with a plain \cmd{chapter} command in this case. The \biblatex package automatically sets a label at the beginning of every \env{refsection} environment, using the standard \cmd{label} command. The identifier used is the string \texttt{refsection:} followed by the number of the respective \env{refsection} environment. The number of the current section is accessible via the \cnt{refsection} counter. When using the \opt{section} option of \cmd{printbibliography}, this counter is also set locally. This means that you may use the counter in heading definitions to print subheadings like «References for Chapter 3», as shown above. You could also use the title of the respective chapter as a subheading by loading the \sty{nameref} package and using \cmd{nameref} instead of \cmd{ref}:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]
 \usepackage{<<nameref>>}
@@ -4495,7 +4581,7 @@ Note the definition of the bibliography heading in the above example. This is th
   \section*{<<\nameref{refsection:\therefsection}>>}}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Since giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for each part of a subdivided bibliography is tedious, \sty{biblatex} provides a shorthand. The \cmd{bibbysection} command automatically loops over all reference sections. This is equivalent to giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for every section but has the additional benefit of automatically skipping sections without references. In the example above, the bibliography would then be generated as follows:
+Since giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for each part of a subdivided bibliography is tedious, \biblatex provides a shorthand. The \cmd{bibbysection} command automatically loops over all reference sections. This is equivalent to giving one \cmd{printbibliography} command for every section but has the additional benefit of automatically skipping sections without references. In the example above, the bibliography would then be generated as follows:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]
 \printbibheading
@@ -4525,7 +4611,7 @@ When using a format with one cumulative bibliography subdivided by chapter (or a
 \end{document}
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-The use of \env{refsegment} is similar to \env{refsection} and there is also a corresponding \opt{segment} option for \cmd{printbibliography}. The \sty{biblatex} package automatically sets a label at the beginning of every \env{refsegment} environment using the string \texttt{refsegment:} followed by the number of the respective \env{refsegment} environment as an identifier. There is a matching \cnt{refsegment} counter which may be used in heading definitions, as shown above. As with reference sections, there is also a shorthand command which automatically loops over all reference segments:
+The use of \env{refsegment} is similar to \env{refsection} and there is also a corresponding \opt{segment} option for \cmd{printbibliography}. The \biblatex package automatically sets a label at the beginning of every \env{refsegment} environment using the string \texttt{refsegment:} followed by the number of the respective \env{refsegment} environment as an identifier. There is a matching \cnt{refsegment} counter which may be used in heading definitions, as shown above. As with reference sections, there is also a shorthand command which automatically loops over all reference segments:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \printbibheading
@@ -4591,7 +4677,7 @@ Dividing a bibliography into primary and secondary sources is possible with a \b
 \printbibliography[<<notkeyword=primary>>,...]
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Since \sty{biblatex} has no way of knowing if an item in the bibliography is considered to be primary or secondary literature, we need to supply the bibliography filter with the required data by adding a \bibfield{keywords} field to each entry in the \file{bib} file. These keywords may then be used as targets for the \opt{keyword} and \opt{notkeyword} filters, as shown above. It may be a good idea to add such keywords right away while building a \file{bib} file.
+Since \biblatex has no way of knowing if an item in the bibliography is considered to be primary or secondary literature, we need to supply the bibliography filter with the required data by adding a \bibfield{keywords} field to each entry in the \file{bib} file. These keywords may then be used as targets for the \opt{keyword} and \opt{notkeyword} filters, as shown above. It may be a good idea to add such keywords right away while building a \file{bib} file.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 @Book{key,
@@ -4650,11 +4736,11 @@ The handling of the headings is different from \cmd{bibbysection} and \cmd{bibby
 \subsubsection{Entry Sets}
 \label{use:use:set}
 
-An entry set is a group of entries which are cited as a single reference and listed as a single item in the bibliography. The individual entries in the set are separated by \cmd{entrysetpunct} (\secref{aut:fmt:fmt}). The \sty{biblatex} package supports two types of entry sets. Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. Dynamic entry sets are defined with \cmd{defbibentryset} (\secref{use:bib:set}) on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis in the document preamble or the document body. This section deals with the definition of entry sets; style authors should also see \secref{aut:cav:set} for further information.
+An entry set is a group of entries which are cited as a single reference and listed as a single item in the bibliography. The individual entries in the set are separated by \cmd{entrysetpunct} (\secref{aut:fmt:fmt}). The \biblatex package supports two types of entry sets. Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. Dynamic entry sets are defined with \cmd{defbibentryset} (\secref{use:bib:set}) on a per-document\slash per-refsection basis in the document preamble or the document body. This section deals with the definition of entry sets; style authors should also see \secref{aut:cav:set} for further information.
 
 \paragraph{Static entry sets}
 
-\BiberOnlyMark Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. When using \biber as the backend, defining an entry set is as simple as adding an entry of type \bibtype{set}. The entry has an \bibfield{entryset} field defining the members of the set as a comma"=separated list of entry keys:
+\BiberOnlyMark Static entry sets are defined in the \file{bib} file like any other entry. When using \biber as the backend, defining an entry set is as simple as adding an entry of type \bibtype{set}. The entry has an \bibfield{entryset} field defining the members of the set as a separated list of entry keys:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 <<@Set>>{<<set1>>,
@@ -4721,7 +4807,7 @@ The \bibtype{xdata} entry type serves as a data container holding one or more fi
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Using a comma"=separated list of keys in its \bibfield{xdata} field, an entry may inherit data from several \bibtype{xdata} entries. Cascading \bibtype{xdata} entries are supported as well, \ie an \bibtype{xdata} entry may reference one or more other \bibtype{xdata} entries:
+Using a separated list of keys in its \bibfield{xdata} field, an entry may inherit data from several \bibtype{xdata} entries. Cascading \bibtype{xdata} entries are supported as well, \ie an \bibtype{xdata} entry may reference one or more other \bibtype{xdata} entries:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 @XData{macmillan:name,
@@ -4746,7 +4832,7 @@ See also \secref{bib:typ:blx,bib:fld:spc}.
 \subsubsection{Electronic Publishing Information}
 \label{use:use:epr}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides three fields for electronic publishing information: \bibfield{eprint}, \bibfield{eprinttype}, and \bibfield{eprintclass}. The \bibfield{eprint} field is a verbatim field similar to \bibfield{doi} which holds the identifier of the item. The \bibfield{eprinttype} field holds the resource name, \ie the name of the site or electronic archive. The optional \bibfield{eprintclass} field is intended for additional information specific to the resource indicated by the \bibfield{eprinttype} field. This could be a section, a path, classification information, etc. If the \bibfield{eprinttype} field is available, the standard styles will use it as a literal label. In the following example, they would print «Resource: identifier» rather than the generic «eprint: identifier»:
+The \biblatex package provides three fields for electronic publishing information: \bibfield{eprint}, \bibfield{eprinttype}, and \bibfield{eprintclass}. The \bibfield{eprint} field is a verbatim field similar to \bibfield{doi} which holds the identifier of the item. The \bibfield{eprinttype} field holds the resource name, \ie the name of the site or electronic archive. The optional \bibfield{eprintclass} field is intended for additional information specific to the resource indicated by the \bibfield{eprinttype} field. This could be a section, a path, classification information, etc. If the \bibfield{eprinttype} field is available, the standard styles will use it as a literal label. In the following example, they would print «Resource: identifier» rather than the generic «eprint: identifier»:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=bibtex]{}
 <<eprint>>     = {<<identifier>>},
@@ -4853,7 +4939,7 @@ This section provides additional usage hints and addresses some common problems
 \subsubsection{Usage with \acr{KOMA}-Script Classes}
 \label{use:cav:scr}
 
-When using \sty{biblatex} in conjunction with one of the \sty{scrbook}, \sty{scrreprt}, or \sty{scrartcl} classes, the headings \texttt{bibliography} and \texttt{shorthands} from \secref{use:bib:hdg} are responsive to the bibliography"=related options of these classes.\footnote{This applies to the traditional syntax of these options (\opt{bibtotoc} and \opt{bibtotocnumbered}) as well as to the \keyval syntax introduced in \acr{KOMA}-Script 3.x, \ie to \kvopt{bibliography}{nottotoc}, \kvopt{bibliography}{totoc}, and \kvopt{bibliography}{totocnumbered}, The global \kvopt{toc}{bibliography} and \kvopt{toc}{bibliographynumbered} options as well as their aliases are detected as well. In any case, the options must be set globally in the optional argument to \cmd{documentclass}.} You can override the default headings by using the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography}, \cmd{printbibheading} and \cmd{printshorthands}. See \secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:los, use:bib:hdg} for details. All default headings are adapted at load-time such that they blend with the behavior of these classes. If one of the above classes is detected, \sty{biblatex} will also provide the following additional tests which may be useful in custom heading definitions:
+When using \biblatex in conjunction with one of the \sty{scrbook}, \sty{scrreprt}, or \sty{scrartcl} classes, the headings \texttt{bibliography} and \texttt{biblist} from \secref{use:bib:hdg} are responsive to the bibliography"=related options of these classes.\footnote{This applies to the traditional syntax of these options (\opt{bibtotoc} and \opt{bibtotocnumbered}) as well as to the \keyval syntax introduced in \acr{KOMA}-Script 3.x, \ie to \kvopt{bibliography}{nottotoc}, \kvopt{bibliography}{totoc}, and \kvopt{bibliography}{totocnumbered}, The global \kvopt{toc}{bibliography} and \kvopt{toc}{bibliographynumbered} options as well as their aliases are detected as well. In any case, the options must be set globally in the optional argument to \cmd{documentclass}.} You can override the default headings by using the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography}, \cmd{printbibheading} and \cmd{printbiblist}. See \secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:biblist, use:bib:hdg} for details. All default headings are adapted at load-time such that they blend with the behavior of these classes. If one of the above classes is detected, \biblatex will also provide the following additional tests which may be useful in custom heading definitions:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -4870,7 +4956,7 @@ Expands to \prm{true} if the class would add the bibliography to the table of co
 \subsubsection{Usage with the Memoir Class}
 \label{use:cav:mem}
 
-When using \sty{biblatex} with the \sty{memoir} class, most class facilities for adapting the bibliography have no effect. Use the corresponding facilities of this package instead (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:hdg, use:bib:nts}). Instead of redefining \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{bibsection}, use the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{defbibheading} (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:hdg}). Instead of \cmd{prebibhook} and \cmd{postbibhook}, use the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{defbibnote} (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:nts}). All default headings are adapted at load-time such that they blend well with the default layout of this class. The default headings \texttt{bibliography} and \texttt{shorthands} (\secref{use:bib:hdg}) are also responsive to \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{bibintoc} and \cmd{nobibintoc} switches. The length register \len{bibitemsep} is used by \sty{biblatex} in a way similar to \sty{memoir} (\secref{use:fmt:len}). This section also introduces some additional length registers which correspond to \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{biblistextra}. Lastly, \cmd{setbiblabel} does not map to a single facility of the \sty{biblatex} package since the style of all labels in the bibliography is controlled by the bibliography style. See \secref{aut:bbx:env} in the author section of this manual for details. If the \sty{memoir} class is detected, \sty{biblatex} will also provide the following additional test which may be useful in custom heading definitions:
+When using \biblatex with the \sty{memoir} class, most class facilities for adapting the bibliography have no effect. Use the corresponding facilities of this package instead (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:hdg, use:bib:nts}). Instead of redefining \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{bibsection}, use the \opt{heading} option of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{defbibheading} (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:hdg}). Instead of \cmd{prebibhook} and \cmd{postbibhook}, use the \opt{prenote} and \opt{postnote} options of \cmd{printbibliography} and \cmd{defbibnote} (\secref{use:bib:bib, use:bib:nts}). All default headings are adapted at load-time such that they blend well with the default layout of this class. The default headings \texttt{bibliography} and \texttt{biblist} (\secref{use:bib:hdg}) are also responsive to \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{bibintoc} and \cmd{nobibintoc} switches. The length register \len{bibitemsep} is used by \biblatex in a way similar to \sty{memoir} (\secref{use:fmt:len}). This section also introduces some additional length registers which correspond to \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{biblistextra}. Lastly, \cmd{setbiblabel} does not map to a single facility of the \biblatex package since the style of all labels in the bibliography is controlled by the bibliography style. See \secref{aut:bbx:env} in the author section of this manual for details. If the \sty{memoir} class is detected, \biblatex will also provide the following additional test which may be useful in custom heading definitions:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -4883,7 +4969,7 @@ Expands to \prm{true} or \prm{false}, depending on \sty{memoir}'s \cmd{bibintoc}
 \subsubsection{Page Numbers in Citations}
 \label{use:cav:pag}
 
-If the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command is a page number or page range, \sty{biblatex} will automatically prefix it with <p.> or <pp.> by default. This works reliably in typical cases, but sometimes manual intervention may be required. In this case, it is important to understand how this argument is handled in detail. First, \sty{biblatex} checks if the postnote is an Arabic or Roman numeral (case insensitive). If this test succeeds, the postnote is considered as a single page or other number which will be prefixed with <p.> or some other string which depends on the \sty{pagination} field (see \secref{bib:use:pag}). If it fails, a second test is performed to find out if the postnote is a range or a list of Arabic or Roman numerals. If this test succeeds, the postnote will be prefixed with <pp.> or some other string in the plural form. If it fails as well, the postnote is printed as is. Note that both tests expand the \prm{postnote}. All commands used in this argument must therefore be robust or prefixed with \cmd{protect}. Here are a few examples of \prm{postnote} arguments which will be correctly recognized as a single number, a range of numbers, or a list of numbers, respectively:
+If the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command is a page number or page range, \biblatex will automatically prefix it with <p.> or <pp.> by default. This works reliably in typical cases, but sometimes manual intervention may be required. In this case, it is important to understand how this argument is handled in detail. First, \biblatex checks if the postnote is an Arabic or Roman numeral (case insensitive). If this test succeeds, the postnote is considered as a single page or other number which will be prefixed with <p.> or some other string which depends on the \sty{pagination} field (see \secref{bib:use:pag}). If it fails, a second test is performed to find out if the postnote is a range or a list of Arabic or Roman numerals. If this test succeeds, the postnote will be prefixed with <pp.> or some other string in the plural form. If it fails as well, the postnote is printed as is. Note that both tests expand the \prm{postnote}. All commands used in this argument must therefore be robust or prefixed with \cmd{protect}. Here are a few examples of \prm{postnote} arguments which will be correctly recognized as a single number, a range of numbers, or a list of numbers, respectively:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \cite[25]{key}
@@ -4897,7 +4983,7 @@ If the \prm{postnote} argument to a citation command is a page number or page ra
 \cite[vii--x; 5, 7]{key}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-In some other cases, however, the tests may get it wrong and you need to resort to the auxiliary commands \cmd{pno}, \cmd{ppno}, and \cmd{nopp} from \secref{use:cit:msc}. For example, suppose a work is cited by a special pagination scheme consisting of numbers and letters. In this scheme, the string <|27a|> would mean <page~27, part~a>. Since this string does not look like a number or a range to \sty{biblatex}, you need to force the prefix for a single number manually:
+In some other cases, however, the tests may get it wrong and you need to resort to the auxiliary commands \cmd{pno}, \cmd{ppno}, and \cmd{nopp} from \secref{use:cit:msc}. For example, suppose a work is cited by a special pagination scheme consisting of numbers and letters. In this scheme, the string <|27a|> would mean <page~27, part~a>. Since this string does not look like a number or a range to \biblatex, you need to force the prefix for a single number manually:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \cite[\pno~27a]{key}
@@ -4949,7 +5035,7 @@ The \prm{postnote} argument is handled as a field and the formatting of this fie
 \subsubsection{Name Parts and Name Spacing}
 \label{use:cav:nam}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package gives users and style authors very fine"=grained control of name spacing and the line"=breaking behavior of names, especially when they are using \biber as the backend. The commands discussed in the following are documented in \secref{use:fmt:fmt,aut:fmt:fmt}. This section is meant to give an overview of how they are put together. A note on terminology: a name \emph{part} is a basic part of the name, for example the first or the last name. Each part of a name may be a single name or it may be composed of multiple names. For example, the name part \enquote*{first name} may be composed of a first and a middle name. The latter are referred to as name \emph{elements} in this section. Let's consider a simple name first: \enquote{John Edward Doe}. This name is composed of the following parts:
+The \biblatex package gives users and style authors very fine"=grained control of name spacing and the line"=breaking behavior of names, especially when they are using \biber as the backend. The commands discussed in the following are documented in \secref{use:fmt:fmt,aut:fmt:fmt}. This section is meant to give an overview of how they are put together. A note on terminology: a name \emph{part} is a basic part of the name, for example the first or the last name. Each part of a name may be a single name or it may be composed of multiple names. For example, the name part \enquote*{first name} may be composed of a first and a middle name. The latter are referred to as name \emph{elements} in this section. Let's consider a simple name first: \enquote{John Edward Doe}. This name is composed of the following parts:
 
 \begin{nameparts}
 First	& John Edward \\
@@ -5036,17 +5122,17 @@ All \latex environments enclosed in \cmd{begin} and \cmd{end} form a group. This
 <<\endrefsection>>
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-This will not from a group, but otherwise works as usual. As far as \sty{biblatex} is concerned, it does not matter which syntax you use. The alternative syntax is also supported by the \env{refsegment} environment. Note that the commands \cmd{newrefsection} and \cmd{newrefsegment} do not form a group. See \secref{use:bib:sec, use:bib:seg} for details.
+This will not from a group, but otherwise works as usual. As far as \biblatex is concerned, it does not matter which syntax you use. The alternative syntax is also supported by the \env{refsegment} environment. Note that the commands \cmd{newrefsection} and \cmd{newrefsegment} do not form a group. See \secref{use:bib:sec, use:bib:seg} for details.
 
 \section{Author Guide}
 \label{aut}
 
-This part of the manual documents the author interface of the \sty{biblatex} package. The author guide covers everything you need to know in order to write new citation and bibliography styles or localization modules. You should read the user guide first before continuing with this part of the manual.
+This part of the manual documents the author interface of the \biblatex package. The author guide covers everything you need to know in order to write new citation and bibliography styles or localization modules. You should read the user guide first before continuing with this part of the manual.
 
 \subsection{Overview}
 \label{aut:int}
 
-Before we get to the commands and facilities provided by \sty{biblatex}, we will have a look at some of its fundamental concepts. The \sty{biblatex} package uses auxiliary files in a special way. Most notably, the \file{bbl} file is used differently and when using \bibtex as the backend, there is only one \file{bst} file which implements a structured data interface rather than exporting printable data. With \latex's standard bibliographic facilities, a document includes any number of citation commands in the document body plus \cmd{bibliographystyle} and \cmd{bibliography}, usually towards the end of the document. The location of the former is arbitrary, the latter marks the spot where the list of references is to be printed:
+Before we get to the commands and facilities provided by \biblatex, we will have a look at some of its fundamental concepts. The \biblatex package uses auxiliary files in a special way. Most notably, the \file{bbl} file is used differently and when using \bibtex as the backend, there is only one \file{bst} file which implements a structured data interface rather than exporting printable data. With \latex's standard bibliographic facilities, a document includes any number of citation commands in the document body plus \cmd{bibliographystyle} and \cmd{bibliography}, usually towards the end of the document. The location of the former is arbitrary, the latter marks the spot where the list of references is to be printed:
 
 \begin{ltxexample}
 \documentclass{...}
@@ -5106,7 +5192,7 @@ Implementing a different citation style implies that more data has to be transfe
 and Samarin}}}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The \sty{biblatex} package supports citations in any arbitrary format, hence citation commands need access to all bibliographic data. What this would mean within the scope of the procedure outlined above becomes obvious when looking at the output of the \sty{jurabib} package which also makes all bibliographic data available in citations:
+The \biblatex package supports citations in any arbitrary format, hence citation commands need access to all bibliographic data. What this would mean within the scope of the procedure outlined above becomes obvious when looking at the output of the \sty{jurabib} package which also makes all bibliographic data available in citations:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \bibcite{companion}{{Goossens\jbbfsasep Mittelbach\jbbstasep Samarin}%
@@ -5118,9 +5204,9 @@ The \sty{biblatex} package supports citations in any arbitrary format, hence cit
   Addison-Wesley\bibbdsep{} 1994}}}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-In this case, the contents of the entire \env{thebibliography} environment are effectively transferred via the \file{aux} file. The data is read from the \file{bbl} file, written to the \file{aux} file, read back from the \file{aux} file and then kept in memory. The bibliography itself is still generated as the \file{bbl} file is read in. The \sty{biblatex} package would also be forced to cycle all data through the \file{aux} file. This implies processing overhead and is also redundant because the data has to be kept in memory anyway.
+In this case, the contents of the entire \env{thebibliography} environment are effectively transferred via the \file{aux} file. The data is read from the \file{bbl} file, written to the \file{aux} file, read back from the \file{aux} file and then kept in memory. The bibliography itself is still generated as the \file{bbl} file is read in. The \biblatex package would also be forced to cycle all data through the \file{aux} file. This implies processing overhead and is also redundant because the data has to be kept in memory anyway.
 
-The traditional procedure is based on the assumption that the full bibliographic data of an entry is only required in the bibliography and that all citations use short labels. This makes it very effective in terms of memory requirements, but it also implies that it does not scale well. That is why \sty{biblatex} takes a different approach. First of all, the document structure is slightly different. Instead of using \cmd{bibliography} in the document body, database files are specified in the preamble with \cmd{addbibresource}, \cmd{bibliographystyle} is omitted entirely (all features are controlled by package options), and the bibliography is printed using \cmd{printbibliography}:
+The traditional procedure is based on the assumption that the full bibliographic data of an entry is only required in the bibliography and that all citations use short labels. This makes it very effective in terms of memory requirements, but it also implies that it does not scale well. That is why \biblatex takes a different approach. First of all, the document structure is slightly different. Instead of using \cmd{bibliography} in the document body, database files are specified in the preamble with \cmd{addbibresource}, \cmd{bibliographystyle} is omitted entirely (all features are controlled by package options), and the bibliography is printed using \cmd{printbibliography}:
 
 \begin{ltxexample}
 \documentclass{...}
@@ -5133,15 +5219,15 @@ The traditional procedure is based on the assumption that the full bibliographic
 \end{document}
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-In order to streamline the whole procedure, \sty{biblatex} essentially employs the \file{bbl} file like an \file{aux} file, rendering \cmd{bibcite} obsolete. We then get the following procedure:
+In order to streamline the whole procedure, \biblatex essentially employs the \file{bbl} file like an \file{aux} file, rendering \cmd{bibcite} obsolete. We then get the following procedure:
 
 \begin{enumerate}
 
-\item Run \bin{latex}: The first step is similar to the traditional procedure described above: \cmd{bibstyle} and \cmd{bibdata} commands are written to the \file{aux} file (\bibtex backend) or \file{bcf} file (\biber backend), along with \cmd{citation} commands for all citations. We then wait for the backend to supply the required data. With \bibtex as a backend, since \sty{biblatex} uses a special \file{bst} file which implements its data interface on the \bibtex end, the \cmd{bibstyle} command is always |\bibstyle{biblatex}|.
+\item Run \bin{latex}: The first step is similar to the traditional procedure described above: \cmd{bibstyle} and \cmd{bibdata} commands are written to the \file{aux} file (\bibtex backend) or \file{bcf} file (\biber backend), along with \cmd{citation} commands for all citations. We then wait for the backend to supply the required data. With \bibtex as a backend, since \biblatex uses a special \file{bst} file which implements its data interface on the \bibtex end, the \cmd{bibstyle} command is always |\bibstyle{biblatex}|.
 
 \item Run \bin{biber} or \bin{bibtex}: The backend supplies those entries from the \file{bib} file which were requested by the \cmd{citation} commands in the auxiliary file. However, it does not write a printable bibliography to the \file{bbl} file, but rather a structured representation of the bibliographic data. Just like an \file{aux} file, this \file{bbl} file does not print anything when read in. It merely puts data in memory.
 
-\item Run \bin{latex}: Starting with the second run, the \file{bbl} file is processed right at the beginning of the document body, just like an \file{aux} file. From this point on, all bibliographic data is available in memory so that all citations can be printed right away.\footnote{If the \opt{defernumbers} package option is enabled \sty{biblatex} uses an algorithm similar to the traditional procedure to generate numeric labels. In this case, the numbers are assigned as the bibliography is printed and then cycled through the backend auxiliary file. It will take an additional \latex run for them to be picked up in citations.} The citation commands have access to the complete bibliographic data, not only to a predefined label. The bibliography is generated from memory using the same data and may be filtered or split as required.
+\item Run \bin{latex}: Starting with the second run, the \file{bbl} file is processed right at the beginning of the document body, just like an \file{aux} file. From this point on, all bibliographic data is available in memory so that all citations can be printed right away.\footnote{If the \opt{defernumbers} package option is enabled \biblatex uses an algorithm similar to the traditional procedure to generate numeric labels. In this case, the numbers are assigned as the bibliography is printed and then cycled through the backend auxiliary file. It will take an additional \latex run for them to be picked up in citations.} The citation commands have access to the complete bibliographic data, not only to a predefined label. The bibliography is generated from memory using the same data and may be filtered or split as required.
 
 \end{enumerate}
 
@@ -5157,7 +5243,7 @@ Let's consider the sample entry given above once more:
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-With \sty{biblatex} and the \biber backend, this entry is essentially exported in the following format:
+With \biblatex and the \biber backend, this entry is essentially exported in the following format:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \entry{companion}{book}{}
@@ -5187,7 +5273,7 @@ As seen in this example, the data is presented in a structured format that resem
 \subsection{Bibliography Styles}
 \label{aut:bbx}
 
-A bibliography style is a set of macros which print the entries in the bibliography. Such styles are defined in files with the suffix \file{bbx}. The \sty{biblatex} package loads the selected bibliography style file at the end of the package. Note that a small repertory of frequently used macros shared by several of the standard bibliography styles is included in \path{biblatex.def}. This file is loaded at the end of the package as well, prior to the selected bibliography style.
+A bibliography style is a set of macros which print the entries in the bibliography. Such styles are defined in files with the suffix \file{bbx}. The \biblatex package loads the selected bibliography style file at the end of the package. Note that a small repertory of frequently used macros shared by several of the standard bibliography styles is included in \path{biblatex.def}. This file is loaded at the end of the package as well, prior to the selected bibliography style.
 
 \subsubsection{Bibliography Style Files}
 \label{aut:bbx:bbx}
@@ -5201,7 +5287,7 @@ Before we go over the individual components of a bibliography style, consider th
   {...}
   {...}
   {...}
-\defbibenvironment{shorthands}
+\defbibenvironment{shorthand}
   {...}
   {...}
   {...}
@@ -5210,7 +5296,7 @@ Before we go over the individual components of a bibliography style, consider th
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{...}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{...}
 ...
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthands}{...}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorthand}{...}
 \endinput
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
@@ -5228,7 +5314,7 @@ Specifies arbitrary \prm{code} to be inserted at the beginning of the bibliograp
 
 \cmditem{DeclareBibliographyDriver}{entrytype}{code}
 
-Defines a bibliography driver. A <driver> is a macro which handles a specific entry type. The \prm{entrytype} corresponds to the entry type used in \file{bib} files, specified in lowercase letters (see \secref{bib:typ}). The type \texttt{shorthands} has a special meaning. The \texttt{shorthands} driver handles all entries in the list of shorthands. The \prm{entrytype} argument may also be an asterisk. In this case, the driver serves as a fallback which is used if no specific driver for the entry type has been defined. The \prm{code} is arbitrary code which typesets all bibliography entries of the respective \prm{entrytype}. This command is mandatory. Every bibliography style should provide a driver for each entry type.
+Defines a bibliography driver. A <driver> is a macro which handles a specific entry type (when printing bibliography lists) or a specific named bibliography list (when printing bibliography lists). The \prm{entrytype} corresponds to the entry type used in \file{bib} files, specified in lowercase letters (see \secref{bib:typ}). The \prm{entrytype} argument may also be an asterisk. In this case, the driver serves as a fallback which is used if no specific driver for the entry type has been defined. The \prm{code} is arbitrary code which typesets all bibliography entries of the respective \prm{entrytype}. This command is mandatory. Every bibliography style should provide a driver for each entry type.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareBibliographyAlias}{alias}{entrytype}
 
@@ -5246,14 +5332,14 @@ giving <\texttt{somekey}> without a value is equivalent to <\kvopt{somekey}{true
 
 \cmditem{DeclareEntryOption}{key}[value]{code}
 
-Similar to \cmd{DeclareBibliographyOption} but defines options which are settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field from \secref{bib:fld:spc}. The \prm{code} is executed whenever \sty{biblatex} prepares the data of the entry for use by a citation command or a bibliography driver.
+Similar to \cmd{DeclareBibliographyOption} but defines options which are settable on a per"=entry basis in the \bibfield{options} field from \secref{bib:fld:spc}. The \prm{code} is executed whenever \biblatex prepares the data of the entry for use by a citation command or a bibliography driver.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
 \subsubsection{Bibliography Environments}
 \label{aut:bbx:env}
 
-Apart from defining bibliography drivers, the bibliography style is also responsible for the environments which control the layout of the bibliography and the list of shorthands. These environments are defined with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. By default, \cmd{printbibliography} uses the environment \opt{bibliography}. Here is a definition suitable for a bibliography style which does not print any labels in the bibliography:
+Apart from defining bibliography drivers, the bibliography style is also responsible for the environments which control the layout of the bibliography and bibliography lists. These environments are defined with \cmd{defbibenvironment}. By default, \cmd{printbibliography} uses the environment \opt{bibliography}. Here is a definition suitable for a bibliography style which does not print any labels in the bibliography:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \defbibenvironment{bibliography}
@@ -5267,7 +5353,7 @@ Apart from defining bibliography drivers, the bibliography style is also respons
   {\item}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-This definition employs a \env{list} environment with hanging indentation, using the \cmd{bibhang} length register provided by \sty{biblatex}. It allows for a certain degree of configurability by using \cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{bibparsep}, two length registers provided by \sty{biblatex} for this very purpose (see \secref{aut:fmt:len}). The \texttt{authoryear} and \texttt{authortitle} bibliography styles use a definition similar to this example.
+This definition employs a \env{list} environment with hanging indentation, using the \cmd{bibhang} length register provided by \biblatex. It allows for a certain degree of configurability by using \cmd{bibitemsep} and \cmd{bibparsep}, two length registers provided by \biblatex for this very purpose (see \secref{aut:fmt:len}). The \texttt{authoryear} and \texttt{authortitle} bibliography styles use a definition similar to this example.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \defbibenvironment{bibliography}
@@ -5284,12 +5370,12 @@ This definition employs a \env{list} environment with hanging indentation, using
   {\item}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Some bibliography styles print labels in the bibliography. For example, a bibliography style designed for a numeric citation scheme will print the number of every entry such that the bibliography looks like a numbered list. In the first example, the first argument to \cmd{list} was empty. In this example, we need it to insert the number, which is provided by \sty{biblatex} in the \bibfield{labelnumber} field. We also employ several length registers and other facilities provided by \sty{biblatex}, see \secref{aut:fmt:ich, aut:fmt:ilc} for details. The \texttt{numeric} bibliography style uses the definition given above. The \texttt{alphabetic} style is similar, except that \textsf{\texttt{labelnumber}} is replaced by \texttt{labelalpha} and \texttt{labelnumberwidth} by \texttt{labelalphawidth}.
+Some bibliography styles print labels in the bibliography. For example, a bibliography style designed for a numeric citation scheme will print the number of every entry such that the bibliography looks like a numbered list. In the first example, the first argument to \cmd{list} was empty. In this example, we need it to insert the number, which is provided by \biblatex in the \bibfield{labelnumber} field. We also employ several length registers and other facilities provided by \biblatex, see \secref{aut:fmt:ich, aut:fmt:ilc} for details. The \texttt{numeric} bibliography style uses the definition given above. The \texttt{alphabetic} style is similar, except that \textsf{\texttt{labelnumber}} is replaced by \texttt{labelalpha} and \texttt{labelnumberwidth} by \texttt{labelalphawidth}.
 
-The list of shorthands is handled in a similar way. \cmd{printshorthands} uses the environment \opt{shorthands} by default. A typical example is given below. See \secref{aut:fmt:ich, aut:fmt:ilc} for details on the length registers and facilities used in this example.
+Bibliography lists are handled in a similar way. \cmd{printbiblist} uses the environment named after the bibliography list by default (when using \bibtex, \cmd{printshorthands} always uses the \texttt{shorthand} environment). A typical example is given below. See \secref{aut:fmt:ich, aut:fmt:ilc} for details on the length registers and facilities used in this example.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
-\defbibenvironment{shorthands}
+\defbibenvironment{shorthand}
   {\list
      {\printfield[shorthandwidth]{shorthand}}
      {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\shorthandwidth}%
@@ -5306,7 +5392,7 @@ The list of shorthands is handled in a similar way. \cmd{printshorthands} uses t
 \subsubsection{Bibliography Drivers}
 \label{aut:bbx:drv}
 
-Before we go over the commands which form the data interface of the \sty{biblatex} package, it may be instructive to have a look at the structure of a bibliography driver. Note that the example given below is greatly simplified, but still functional. For the sake of readability, we omit several fields which may be part of a \bibtype{book} entry and also simplify the handling of those which are considered. The main point is to give you an idea of how a driver is structured. For information about the mapping of the \bibtex file format fields to \sty{biblatex}'s data types, see \secref{bib:fld}.
+Before we go over the commands which form the data interface of the \biblatex package, it may be instructive to have a look at the structure of a bibliography driver. Note that the example given below is greatly simplified, but still functional. For the sake of readability, we omit several fields which may be part of a \bibtype{book} entry and also simplify the handling of those which are considered. The main point is to give you an idea of how a driver is structured. For information about the mapping of the \bibtex file format fields to \biblatex's data types, see \secref{bib:fld}.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%
@@ -5322,13 +5408,30 @@ Before we go over the commands which form the data interface of the \sty{biblate
   \finentry}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-At this point, there is still one piece missing: the formatting directives used by \cmd{printnames}, \cmd{printlist}, and \cmd{printfield}. To give you an idea of what a formatting directive looks like, here are some fictional ones used by our sample driver. Field formats are straightforward, the value of the field is passed to the formatting directive as an argument which may be formatted as desired. The following directive will simply wrap its argument in an \cmd{emph} command:
+The standard bibliography styles employ two bibliography macros \texttt{begentry} and \texttt{finentry}:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{<<entrytype>>}{%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}
+  ...
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+with the default definitions
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\newbibmacro*{begentry}{}
+\newbibmacro*{finentry}{\finentry}
+\end{lstlisting}
+%
+Use of these macros is recommended for easy hooks into the beginning and end of the driver.
+
+Returning to the driver for the \texttt{book} entrytype above, there is still one piece missing: the formatting directives used by \cmd{printnames}, \cmd{printlist}, and \cmd{printfield}. To give you an idea of what a formatting directive looks like, here are some fictional ones used by our sample driver. Field formats are straightforward, the value of the field is passed to the formatting directive as an argument which may be formatted as desired. The following directive will simply wrap its argument in an \cmd{emph} command:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\emph{#1}}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-List formats are slightly more complex. After splitting up the list into individual items, \sty{biblatex} will execute the formatting directive once for every item in the list. The item is passed to the directive as an argument. The separator to be inserted between the individual items in the list is also handled by the corresponding directive, hence we have to check whether we are in the middle of the list or at the end when inserting it.
+List formats are slightly more complex. After splitting up the list into individual items, \biblatex will execute the formatting directive once for every item in the list. The item is passed to the directive as an argument. The separator to be inserted between the individual items in the list is also handled by the corresponding directive, hence we have to check whether we are in the middle of the list or at the end when inserting it.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareListFormat{location}{%
@@ -5357,7 +5460,7 @@ The above directive reverses the name of the first author («Last, First») and
 \subsubsection{Special Fields}
 \label{aut:bbx:fld}
 
-The following lists and fields are used by \sty{biblatex} to pass data to bibliography drivers and citation commands. They are not used in \file{bib} files but defined automatically by the package. From the perspective of a bibliography or citation style, they are not different from the fields in a \file{bib} file.
+The following lists and fields are used by \biblatex to pass data to bibliography drivers and citation commands. They are not used in \file{bib} files but defined automatically by the package. From the perspective of a bibliography or citation style, they are not different from the fields in a \file{bib} file.
 
 \paragraph{Generic Fields}
 \label{aut:bbx:fld:gen}
@@ -5366,11 +5469,11 @@ The following lists and fields are used by \sty{biblatex} to pass data to biblio
 
 \fielditem{entrykey}{string}
 
-The entry key of an item in the \file{bib} file. This is the string used by \sty{biblatex} and the backend to identify an entry in the \file{bib} file. 
+The entry key of an item in the \file{bib} file. This is the string used by \biblatex and the backend to identify an entry in the \file{bib} file. 
 
 \fielditem{childentrykey}{string}
 
-When citing a subentry of an entry set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrykey} field holds the entry key of the parent. The entry key of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrykey} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
+When citing a subentry of an entry set, \biblatex provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrykey} field holds the entry key of the parent. The entry key of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrykey} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
 
 \fielditem{datelabelsource}{literal\BiberOnlyMark}
 
@@ -5398,7 +5501,7 @@ The entry type (\bibtype{book}, \bibtype{inbook}, etc.), given in lowercase lett
 
 \fielditem{childentrytype}{string}
 
-When citing a subentry of an entry set, \sty{biblatex} provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrytype} field holds the entry type of the parent. The entry type of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrytype} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
+When citing a subentry of an entry set, \biblatex provides the data of the parent \bibtype{set} entry to citation commands. This implies that the \bibfield{entrytype} field holds the entry type of the parent. The entry type of the child entry being cited is provided in the \bibfield{childentrytype} field. This field is only available when citing a subentry of an entry set.
 
 \fielditem{entrysetcount}{integer}
 
@@ -5422,7 +5525,12 @@ If the \opt{backref} package option is enabled, this list holds the page numbers
 
 \fielditem{sortinit}{literal}
 
-This field holds the initial letter of the string used during sorting. This is useful when subdividing the bibliography alphabetically.
+This field holds the initial character of the information used during sorting.
+With \bibtex, this field is also used internally instead of \bibfield{sortinithash}.
+
+\fielditem{sortinithash}{string\BiberOnlyMark}
+
+With \biber, this field holds a hash of the (locale-specific) Unicode Collation Algorithm primary weight of the first extended grapheme cluster (essentially the first character) of the string used during sorting. This is useful when subdividing the bibliography alphabetically and is used internally by \cmd{bibinitsep} (see \secref{use:fmt:len}).
 
 \fielditem{clonesourcekey}{string\BiberOnlyMark}
 
@@ -5438,7 +5546,7 @@ entries which are mentioned in \bibfield{related} fields as part of related entr
 
 \fielditem{labelalpha}{literal}
 
-When using \bibtex as the backend, a label similar to the labels generated by the \path{alpha.bst} style of traditional \bibtex. This default label consists of initials drawn from the \bibfield{labelname} list plus the last two digits of the publication year. The \bibfield{label} field may be used to override its non"=numeric portion. If the \bibfield{label} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} will use its value and append the last two digits of the publication year when generating \bibfield{labelalpha}. The \bibfield{shorthand} field may be used to override the entire label. If defined, \bibfield{labelalpha} is the \bibfield{shorthand} rather than an automatically generated label. \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, users can specify a template used to construct the alphabetic label (see \secref{aut:ctm:lab}) and the default template mirrors the format mentioned for bibtex above. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha} (\secref{use:opt:pre:int}). See also \bibfield{extraalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
+When using \bibtex as the backend, a label similar to the labels generated by the \path{alpha.bst} style of traditional \bibtex. This default label consists of initials drawn from the \bibfield{labelname} list plus the last two digits of the publication year. The \bibfield{label} field may be used to override its non"=numeric portion. If the \bibfield{label} field is defined, \biblatex will use its value and append the last two digits of the publication year when generating \bibfield{labelalpha}. The \bibfield{shorthand} field may be used to override the entire label. If defined, \bibfield{labelalpha} is the \bibfield{shorthand} rather than an automatically generated label. \BiberOnlyMark With \biber, users can specify a template used to construct the alphabetic label (see \secref{aut:ctm:lab}) and the default template mirrors the format mentioned for bibtex above. A complete <alphabetic> label consists of the fields \bibfield{labelalpha} plus \bibfield{extraalpha}. Note that the \bibfield{labelalpha} and \bibfield{extraalpha} fields need to be requested with the package option \opt{labelalpha} (\secref{use:opt:pre:int}). See also \bibfield{extraalpha} as well as \cmd{labelalphaothers} in \secref{use:fmt:fmt}.
 
 \fielditem{extraalpha}{integer}
 
@@ -5451,11 +5559,11 @@ The name to be printed in citations. This list is a copy of either the \bibfield
 
 \fielditem{labelnumber}{literal}
 
-The number of the bibliography entry, as required by numeric citation schemes. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} does not assign a number to the respective entry. In this case \bibfield{labelnumber} is the shorthand rather than a number. Numeric styles must use the value of this field instead of a counter. Note that this field needs to be requested with the package option \opt{labelnumber}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. Also see the package option \opt{defernumbers} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
+The number of the bibliography entry, as required by numeric citation schemes. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \biblatex does not assign a number to the respective entry. In this case \bibfield{labelnumber} is the shorthand rather than a number. Numeric styles must use the value of this field instead of a counter. Note that this field needs to be requested with the package option \opt{labelnumber}, see \secref{use:opt:pre:int} for details. Also see the package option \opt{defernumbers} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
 
 \fielditem{prefixnumber}{literal}
 
-If the \opt{prefixnumbers} option of \cmd{printbibliography} has been set in order to prefix all entries in a subbibliography with a fixed string, this string is available in the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of all affected entries. If no prefix has been set, the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of the respective entry is undefined. See the \opt{prefixnumbers} option of \cmd{printbibliography} in \secref{use:bib:bib} for details. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \sty{biblatex} does not assign the prefix to the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of the respective entry. In this case, the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field is undefined.
+If the \opt{prefixnumbers} option of \cmd{printbibliography} has been set in order to prefix all entries in a subbibliography with a fixed string, this string is available in the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of all affected entries. If no prefix has been set, the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of the respective entry is undefined. See the \opt{prefixnumbers} option of \cmd{printbibliography} in \secref{use:bib:bib} for details. If the \bibfield{shorthand} field is defined, \biblatex does not assign the prefix to the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field of the respective entry. In this case, the \bibfield{prefixnumber} field is undefined.
 
 \fielditem{labeltitle}{literal}
 
@@ -5664,7 +5772,7 @@ If the date specification in the \bibfield{urldate} field is a range, this field
 \subsection{Citation Styles}
 \label{aut:cbx}
 
-A citation style is a set of commands such as \cmd{cite} which print different types of citations. Such styles are defined in files with the suffix \file{cbx}. The \sty{biblatex} package loads the selected citation style file at the end of the package. Note that a small repertory of frequently used macros shared by several of the standard citation styles is also included in \path{biblatex.def}. This file is loaded at the end of the package as well, prior to the selected citation style. It also contains the definitions of the commands from \secref{use:cit:txt}.
+A citation style is a set of commands such as \cmd{cite} which print different types of citations. Such styles are defined in files with the suffix \file{cbx}. The \biblatex package loads the selected citation style file at the end of the package. Note that a small repertory of frequently used macros shared by several of the standard citation styles is also included in \path{biblatex.def}. This file is loaded at the end of the package as well, prior to the selected citation style. It also contains the definitions of the commands from \secref{use:cit:txt}.
 
 \subsubsection{Citation Style Files}
 \label{aut:cbx:cbx}
@@ -5722,13 +5830,19 @@ This command provides definitions for the \cmd{autocite} and \cmd{autocites} com
 \DeclareAutoCiteCommand{footnote}[l]{\footcite}{\footcites}
 \DeclareAutoCiteCommand{footnote}[f]{\smartcite}{\smartcites}
 \end{lstlisting}
+%
+A definition provided in the document preamble can be subsequently adopted with the following: (see \secref{use:cfg:opt}).
+
+\begin{ltxexample}
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{autocite=<<name>>} 
+\end{ltxexample}
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
 \subsubsection{Special Fields}
 \label{aut:cbx:fld}
 
-The following fields are used by \sty{biblatex} to pass data to citation commands. They are not used in \file{bib} files but defined automatically by the package. From the perspective of a citation style, they are not different from the fields in a \file{bib} file. See also \secref{aut:bbx:fld}.
+The following fields are used by \biblatex to pass data to citation commands. They are not used in \file{bib} files but defined automatically by the package. From the perspective of a citation style, they are not different from the fields in a \file{bib} file. See also \secref{aut:bbx:fld}.
 
 \begin{fieldlist}
 
@@ -5762,7 +5876,7 @@ The data interface are the facilities used to format and print all bibliographic
 \subsubsection{Data Commands}
 \label{aut:bib:dat}
 
-This section introduces the main data interface of the \sty{biblatex} package. These are the commands doing most of the work, \ie they actually print the data provided in lists and fields.
+This section introduces the main data interface of the \biblatex package. These are the commands doing most of the work, \ie they actually print the data provided in lists and fields.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -5800,7 +5914,7 @@ Whenever \cmd{printnames} and \cmd{printlist} process a list, information concer
 
 \cmditem{printtext}[format]{text}
 
-This command prints \prm{text}, which may be printable text or arbitrary code generating printable text. It clears the punctuation buffer before inserting \prm{text} and informs \sty{biblatex} that printable text has been inserted. This ensures that all preceding and following \cmd{newblock} and \cmd{newunit} commands have the desired effect. \cmd{printfield} and \cmd{printnames} as well as \cmd{bibstring} and its companion commands (see \secref{aut:str}) do that automatically. Using this command is required if a bibliography styles inserts literal text (including the commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc}) to ensure that block and unit punctuation works as advertised in \secref{aut:pct:new}. The optional \prm{format} argument specifies a field formatting directive to be used to format \prm{text}. This may also be useful when several fields are to be printed as one chunk, for example, by enclosing the entire chunk in parentheses or quotation marks. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{format} is omitted, the \prm{text} is printed as is. See also \secref{aut:cav:pct} for some practical hints.
+This command prints \prm{text}, which may be printable text or arbitrary code generating printable text. It clears the punctuation buffer before inserting \prm{text} and informs \biblatex that printable text has been inserted. This ensures that all preceding and following \cmd{newblock} and \cmd{newunit} commands have the desired effect. \cmd{printfield} and \cmd{printnames} as well as \cmd{bibstring} and its companion commands (see \secref{aut:str}) do that automatically. Using this command is required if a bibliography styles inserts literal text (including the commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc}) to ensure that block and unit punctuation works as advertised in \secref{aut:pct:new}. The optional \prm{format} argument specifies a field formatting directive to be used to format \prm{text}. This may also be useful when several fields are to be printed as one chunk, for example, by enclosing the entire chunk in parentheses or quotation marks. If a type"=specific \prm{format} has been declared, the type"=specific formatting directive takes precedence over the generic one. If the \prm{format} is omitted, the \prm{text} is printed as is. See also \secref{aut:cav:pct} for some practical hints.
 
 \cmditem{printfile}[format]{file}
 
@@ -5969,18 +6083,18 @@ The related entries feature comprises the following components:
 %
 The special fields are \bibfield{related}, \bibfield{relatedtype}, \bibfield{relatedstring} and \bibfield{relatedoptions}:
 \begin{keymarglist}
-\item[related] A comma"=separated list of keys of entries which are related to this entry in some way. Note the the order of the keys is important. The data from multiple related entries is printed in the order of the keys listed in this field.
+\item[related] A separated list of keys of entries which are related to this entry in some way. Note the the order of the keys is important. The data from multiple related entries is printed in the order of the keys listed in this field.
 \item[relatedtype] The type of relationship. This serves three purposes. If the value of this field resolves to a localization string identifier, then the resulting localized string is printed before the data from the related entries. Secondly, if there is a macro called \texttt{related:\prm{relatedtype}}, this is used to format the data from the related entries. If no such macro exists, then the macro \texttt{related:default} is used. Lastly, if there is a format named \texttt{related:\prm{relatedtype}}, then it is used to format both the localized string and related entry data. If there is no related type specific format, the \texttt{related} format is used.
 \item[relatedstring] If an entry contains this field, then if value of the field resolves to a localization string identifier, the localization key value specified is printed before data from the related entries. If the field does not specify a localization key, its value is printed literally. If both \bibfield{relatedtype} and \bibfield{relatedstring} are present in an entry, \bibfield{relatedstring} is used for the pre-data string (but \bibfield{relatedtype} is still used to determine the macro and format to use when printing the data).
 \item[relatedoptions] A list of per"=entry options to set on the related entry (actually on the clone of the related entry which is used as a data source---the actual related entry is not modified because it might be cited directly itself).
 \end{keymarglist}
 
-The related entry feature is enabled by default by the package option \opt{related} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The related information entry data from the related entries is included via a \cmd{usebibmacro\{related\}} call. Standard styles call this macro towards the end of each driver. Style authors should ensure the existence of (or take note of existing) localization strings which are useful as values for the \bibfield{relatedtype} field, such as \texttt{translationof} or perhaps \texttt{translatedas}. A plural variant can be identified with the localization key \prm{relatedtype}\texttt{s}. This key's corresponding string is printed whenever more than one entry is specified in \bibfield{related}. Bibliography macros and formatting directives for printing entries related by \prm{relatedtype} should be defined using the name \texttt{related:\prm{relatedtype}}. The file \path{biblatex.def} contains macros and formats for some common relation types which can be used as templates. In particular, the \cmd{entrydata*} command is essential in such macros in order to make the data of the related entries available. Examples of entries using this feature can be found in the \sty{biblatex} distribution examples file \path{biblatex-examples.bib}. There are some specific formatting macros for this feature which control delimiters and separators in related entry information, see \secref{aut:fmt:fmt}.
+The related entry feature is enabled by default by the package option \opt{related} from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. The related information entry data from the related entries is included via a \cmd{usebibmacro\{related\}} call. Standard styles call this macro towards the end of each driver. Style authors should ensure the existence of (or take note of existing) localization strings which are useful as values for the \bibfield{relatedtype} field, such as \texttt{translationof} or perhaps \texttt{translatedas}. A plural variant can be identified with the localization key \prm{relatedtype}\texttt{s}. This key's corresponding string is printed whenever more than one entry is specified in \bibfield{related}. Bibliography macros and formatting directives for printing entries related by \prm{relatedtype} should be defined using the name \texttt{related:\prm{relatedtype}}. The file \path{biblatex.def} contains macros and formats for some common relation types which can be used as templates. In particular, the \cmd{entrydata*} command is essential in such macros in order to make the data of the related entries available. Examples of entries using this feature can be found in the \biblatex distribution examples file \path{biblatex-examples.bib}. There are some specific formatting macros for this feature which control delimiters and separators in related entry information, see \secref{aut:fmt:fmt}.
 
 \subsubsection{Dynamic Modification of Data}
 \label{aut:ctm:map}
 
-Bibliographic data sources which are automatically generated or which you have no control over can be a problem if you need to edit them in some way. For this reason, \biber has the ability to modify data as it is read so that you can apply modifications to the source data stream without actually changing it. The modification can be defined in \biber's config file (see \biber docs), or via \sty{biblatex} macros in which case you can apply the modification only for specific documents, styles or globally.
+Bibliographic data sources which are automatically generated or which you have no control over can be a problem if you need to edit them in some way. For this reason, \biber has the ability to modify data as it is read so that you can apply modifications to the source data stream without actually changing it. The modification can be defined in \biber's config file (see \biber docs), or via \biblatex macros in which case you can apply the modification only for specific documents, styles or globally.
 
 Source mappings can be defined at different «levels» which are applied
 in a defined order. See the \biblatex\ manual regarding these macros:\\[2ex]
@@ -6009,7 +6123,7 @@ Defines source data modification (mapping) rules which can be used to perform an
   entrytype
 \end{itemize}
 
-The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{maps} directives which specify containers for mappings rules applying to a particular data source type (\secref{use:bib:res}). Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible. This command may only be used in the preamble. 
+The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{maps} directives which specify containers for mappings rules applying to a particular data source type (\secref{use:bib:res}). Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible. This command may only be used in the preamble and may only be used once---subsequent uses will overwrite earlier definitions.
 
 \cmditem{maps}{elements}
 
@@ -6119,7 +6233,7 @@ be changed (used as \texttt{fieldset}, \texttt{fieldtarget} or changed using \te
 
 \cmditem{DeclareStyleSourcemap}{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
-This command sets the source mappings used by a style. Such mappings are conceptually separate from user mappings defined with \cmd{DeclareSourcemap} and are applied directly after user maps. The syntax is identical to \cmd{DeclareSourcemap}. This command is provided for style authors so that any maps defined for the style do not interfere with user maps or the default driver maps defined with \cmd{DeclareDriverSourcemap}.
+This command sets the source mappings used by a style. Such mappings are conceptually separate from user mappings defined with \cmd{DeclareSourcemap} and are applied directly after user maps. The syntax is identical to \cmd{DeclareSourcemap}. This command is provided for style authors so that any maps defined for the style do not interfere with user maps or the default driver maps defined with \cmd{DeclareDriverSourcemap}. This command is for use in style files and can only be used once---subsequent uses will overwrite earlier definitions.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -6399,10 +6513,10 @@ This example assumes you have created a field called \bibfield{autourl} using th
 %
 Any entry with a \bibfield{title} field matching <A Title> will be completely ignored.
 %
-\subsubsection{Data Model Specification}
+\subsubsection{Data Model Specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 \label{aut:ctm:dm}
 
-The data model which \sty{biblatex} uses consists of four main elements:
+The data model which \biblatex uses consists of four main elements:
 
 \begin{itemize}
 \item Specification of valid Entrytypes
@@ -6411,7 +6525,7 @@ The data model which \sty{biblatex} uses consists of four main elements:
 \item Specification of constraints which can be used to validate data against the data model
 \end{itemize}
 
-The default data model is defined in the core \sty{biblatex} file \file{blx-dm.def} using the macros described in this section. The default data model is described in detail in \secref{bib}. The data model is used internally by \sty{biblatex} and also by the backends. The data model for the \bibtex backend is hard-coded and cannot be changed. Changing the data model is only supported for the \biber backend. In practice, changing the data model means that you can define the entrytypes and fields for your datasources and validate your data against the data model. Naturally, this is not much use unless your style supports any new entrytypes or fields and it raises issues of portability between styles (although this can be mitigated by using the dynamic data modification functionality described in \secref{aut:ctm:map}).
+The default data model is defined in the core \biblatex file \file{blx-dm.def} using the macros described in this section. The default data model is described in detail in \secref{bib}. The data model is used internally by \biblatex and also by the backends. The data model for the \bibtex backend is hard-coded and cannot be changed. Changing the data model is only supported for the \biber backend. In practice, changing the data model means that you can define the entrytypes and fields for your datasources and validate your data against the data model. Naturally, this is not much use unless your style supports any new entrytypes or fields and it raises issues of portability between styles (although this can be mitigated by using the dynamic data modification functionality described in \secref{aut:ctm:map}).
 
 Validation against the data model means that after mapping your data sources into the data model, \biber (using its \path{--validate_datamodel} option) can check:
 
@@ -6421,8 +6535,8 @@ Validation against the data model means that after mapping your data sources int
 \item Whether the fields obey various constraints on their format which you specify
 \end{itemize}
 %
-Redefining the data model can be done in several places. Style authors can create a \file{.dbx} file which contains the data model macros required and this will be loaded automatically when using the \sty{biblatex} package \opt{style} option by looking for a file named after the style with a \file{.dbx} extension (just like the \file{.cbx} and \file{.bbx} files for a style). If the \opt{style} option is not used but rather the \opt{citestyle} and \opt{bibstyle} options, then the package will try to load \file{.dbx} files called \file{<citestyle>.dbx} and \file{<bibstyle>.dbx}.
-Alternatively, the name of the data model file can be different from any of the style option names by specifying the name (without \file{.dbx} extension) to the package \opt{datamodel} option. After loading the style data model file, \sty{biblatex} then loads, if present, a users \file{biblatex-dm.cfg} which should be put somewhere \sty{biblatex} can find it, just like the main configuration file \sty{biblatex.cfg}. To summarise, the data model is determined by adding to the data model from each of these locations, in order:\\
+Redefining the data model can be done in several places. Style authors can create a \file{.dbx} file which contains the data model macros required and this will be loaded automatically when using the \biblatex package \opt{style} option by looking for a file named after the style with a \file{.dbx} extension (just like the \file{.cbx} and \file{.bbx} files for a style). If the \opt{style} option is not used but rather the \opt{citestyle} and \opt{bibstyle} options, then the package will try to load \file{.dbx} files called \file{<citestyle>.dbx} and \file{<bibstyle>.dbx}.
+Alternatively, the name of the data model file can be different from any of the style option names by specifying the name (without \file{.dbx} extension) to the package \opt{datamodel} option. After loading the style data model file, \biblatex then loads, if present, a users \file{biblatex-dm.cfg} which should be put somewhere \biblatex can find it, just like the main configuration file \sty{biblatex.cfg}. To summarise, the data model is determined by adding to the data model from each of these locations, in order:\\
 
 \noindent\file{blx-dm.def}$\rightarrow$\\
 \hspace*{1em}\file{<datamodel option>.dbx} $\rightarrow$\\
@@ -6430,13 +6544,13 @@ Alternatively, the name of the data model file can be different from any of the
 \hspace*{3em}\file{<citestyle option>.dbx} and \file{<bibstyle option>.dbx} $\rightarrow$\\
 \hspace*{4em}\file{biblatex-dm.cfg}\\
 
-\noindent The data model is defined using the following macros:
+\noindent It is not possible to add to a loaded data model by using the macros below in your preamble as the preamble is read after \biblatex has defined critical internal macros based on the data model. If any data model macro is used in a document, it will be ignored and a warning will be generated. The data model is defined using the following macros:
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes}[options]{entrytypes}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
-Declares the comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes} to be valid entrytypes in the data model. This command may only be used in a data model configuration file.
+Declares the comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes} to be valid entrytypes in the data model. As usual in \tex csv lists, make sure each element is immediately followed by a comma or the closing brace---no extraneous whitespace.
 
 \begin{optionlist*}
 
@@ -6448,7 +6562,7 @@ This entrytype is not output to the \file{.bbl}. Typically used for special entr
 
 \cmditem{DeclareDatamodelFields}[options]{fields}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
-Declares the comma"=separated list of \prm{fields} to be valid fields in the data model with associated comma"=separated \prm{options}. This command may only be used in a data model configuration file. The \prm{type} and \prm{datatype} options are mandatory. All valid \prm{options} are:
+Declares the comma"=separated list of \prm{fields} to be valid fields in the data model with associated comma"=separated \prm{options}. The \prm{type} and \prm{datatype} options are mandatory. All valid \prm{options} are:
 
 \begin{optionlist*}
 
@@ -6458,7 +6572,7 @@ Set the type of the field as described in \secref{bib:fld:typ}. Is typically <fi
 
 \valitem{format}{field format}
 
-Any special format of the field. Normally unspecified but can take the value <csv>. Used internally by \biber for various things.
+Any special format of the field. Normally unspecified but can take the value <xsv> which tells \biber that this field has a separated values format. The exact separator can be controlled with the \biber option \opt{xsvsep} and defaults to the expected comma surrounded by optional whitespace.
 
 \valitem{datatype}{field datatype}
 
@@ -6470,17 +6584,21 @@ The field is allowed to be defined but empty.
 
 \boolitem[false]{skipout}
 
-The field is not output to the \file{.bbl} and is therefore not present during \sty{biblatex} style processing.
+The field is not output to the \file{.bbl} and is therefore not present during \biblatex style processing. As usual in \tex csv lists, make sure each element is immediately followed by a comma or the closing brace---no extraneous whitespace.
+
+\boolitem[false]{label}
+
+The field can be used as a label in a bibliography or bibliography list. Specifying this causes \biblatex to create several helper macros for the field so that there are some internal lengths and headings etc. defined.
 
 \end{optionlist*}
 
 \cmditem{DeclareDatamodelEntryfields}[entrytypes]{fields}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
-Declares that the comma"=separated list of \prm{fields} is valid for the comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes}. If \prm{entrytypes} is not given, the fields are valid for all entrytypes. This command may only be used in a data model configuration file.
+Declares that the comma"=separated list of \prm{fields} is valid for the comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes}. If \prm{entrytypes} is not given, the fields are valid for all entrytypes. As usual in \tex csv lists, make sure each element is immediately followed by a comma or the closing brace---no extraneous whitespace.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareDatamodelConstraints}[entrytypes]{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 
-If a comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes} is given, the constraints apply only to those entrytypes. The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{constraint} directives which specify a constraint. Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible. This command may only be used in a data model configuration file.
+If a comma"=separated list of \prm{entrytypes} is given, the constraints apply only to those entrytypes. The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{constraint} directives which specify a constraint. Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible.
 
 \cmditem{constraint}[type=constrainttype]{elements}
 
@@ -6548,7 +6666,7 @@ Specifies how many of the \cmd{constraintfield}'s inside the \cmd{consequent} ha
 
 For constraints of \prm{type} <data>, the constraint applies to this \prm{field}. For constraints of \prm{type} <mandatory>, the entry must contain this \prm{field}. 
 
-The data model declaration macros may be used multiple times as they append to the previous definitions. In order to replace, change or remove existing definitions (such as the default model which is loaded with \sty{biblatex}), you should reset (clear) the current definition and then set what you want using the following macros. Typically, these macros will be the first things in any \file{biblatex-dm.cfg} file:
+The data model declaration macros may be used multiple times as they append to the previous definitions. In order to replace, change or remove existing definitions (such as the default model which is loaded with \biblatex), you should reset (clear) the current definition and then set what you want using the following macros. Typically, these macros will be the first things in any \file{biblatex-dm.cfg} file:
 
 \cmditem{ResetDatamodelEntrytypes}
 
@@ -6568,7 +6686,7 @@ Clear all data model fields Constraints information.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
-Here is an example of a simple data model. Refer to the core \sty{biblatex} file \file{blx-dm.def} for the default data model specification.
+Here is an example of a simple data model. Refer to the core \biblatex file \file{blx-dm.def} for the default data model specification.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \ResetDatamodelEntrytypes
@@ -6726,7 +6844,7 @@ Insert the literal \prm{characters} into the label at this point.
 
 Note that the template for labels can be defined per-type and you should be aware of this when using the automatically disambiguated label functionality. Disambiguation is not per-type as this might lead to ambiguity due to different label formats for different types being isolated from each others disambiguation process. Normally, you will want to use very different label formats for different types to make the type obvious by the label.
 
-Here are some examples. The default global \sty{biblatex} alphabetic label template is defined below. Firstly, \bibfield{shorthand} has \kvopt{final}{true} and so if there is a \bibfield{shorthand} field, it is used as the label and nothing more of the template is considered. Next, the \bibfield{label} field is used as the first label element if it exists. Otherwise, if there is only one name (\kvopt{ifnames}{1}) in the \bibfield{labelname} list, then three characters from the left side of the lastname in the \bibfield{labelname} are used as the first label element. If the \bibfield{labelname} has more than one name in it, one character from the left side of each lastname is used as the first label element. The second label element consists of 2 characters from the right side of the \bibfield{year} field.
+Here are some examples. The default global \biblatex alphabetic label template is defined below. Firstly, \bibfield{shorthand} has \kvopt{final}{true} and so if there is a \bibfield{shorthand} field, it is used as the label and nothing more of the template is considered. Next, the \bibfield{label} field is used as the first label element if it exists. Otherwise, if there is only one name (\kvopt{ifnames}{1}) in the \bibfield{labelname} list, then three characters from the left side of the lastname in the \bibfield{labelname} are used as the first label element. If the \bibfield{labelname} has more than one name in it, one character from the left side of each lastname is used as the first label element. The second label element consists of 2 characters from the right side of the \bibfield{year} field.
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareLabelalphaTemplate{
@@ -6919,9 +7037,19 @@ In addition to the predefined sorting schemes discussed in \secref{use:srt}, it
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\cmditem{DeclareSortingScheme}{name}{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+\cmditem{DeclareSortingScheme}[options]{name}{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Defines the sorting scheme \prm{name}. The \prm{name} is the identifier passed to the \opt{sorting} option (\secref{use:opt:pre:gen}) when selecting the sorting scheme. The \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} command supports the following optional arguments:
+
+\begin{optionlist*}
+
+\choitem{locale}{\prm{locale}}
 
-Defines the sorting scheme \prm{name}. The \prm{name} is the identifier passed to the \opt{sorting} option (\secref{use:opt:pre:gen}) when selecting the sorting scheme. The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{sort} directives which specify the elements to be considered in the sorting process. Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible. This command may only be used in the preamble.
+The locale for the sorting scheme which then overrides the global sorting locale in the \opt{sortlocale} option discussed in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. 
+
+\end{optionlist*}
+
+The \prm{specification} is an undelimited list of \cmd{sort} directives which specify the elements to be considered in the sorting process. Spaces, tabs, and line endings may be used freely to visually arrange the \prm{specification}. Blank lines are not permissible. This command may only be used in the preamble.
 
 \cmditem{sort}{elements}
 
@@ -6929,6 +7057,10 @@ Specifies the elements considered in the sorting process. The \prm{elements} are
 
 \begin{optionlist*}
 
+\choitem{locale}{\prm{locale}}
+
+Override the locale used for sorting at the level of a particular set of sorting elements. If specified, the locale overrides the locale set at the level of \cmd{DeclareSortingScheme} and also the global setting. See also the discussion of the global sorting locale option \opt{sortlocale} in \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}.
+
 \choitem[ascending]{direction}{ascending, descending}
 
 The sort direction, which may be either \texttt{ascending} or \texttt{descending}. The default is ascending order.
@@ -7060,6 +7192,24 @@ In the next example, we define the same scheme in a more elaborate way, consider
   }
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
+%
+Finally, here is an example of a sorting scheme which overrides the global sorting locale and additionally overrides again when sorting by the \bibfield{origtitle} field. Note the use in the scheme-level override of a babel/polyglossia language name instead of a real locale identifier. \biber will map this to a suitable, real locale identifier (in this case, \texttt{sv\_SE}):
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareSortingScheme[locale=swedish]{custom}{
+  \sort{
+    \field{<<sortname>>}
+    \field{<<author>>}
+    \field{<<editor>>}
+    \field{<<translator>>}
+    \field{<<sorttitle>>}
+    \field{<<title>>}
+  }
+  \sort[locale=de_DE_phonebook]{
+    \field{<<origtitle>>}
+  }
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -7073,6 +7223,44 @@ Specifies a string to be used to automatically populate the \bibfield{presort} f
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
+\subsubsection[Bibliography List Filters]{Bibliography List Filters\BiberOnlyMark}
+\label{aut:ctm:bibfilt}
+
+When using customisable bibliography lists (See \secref{use:bib:biblist}), usually one wants to return in the \file{.bbl} only those entries which have the particular fields which the bibliography list is summarising. For example, when printing a normal list of shorthands, you want the list returned by \biber in the \file{.bbl} to contain only those entries which have a \bibfield{shorthand} field. This is accomplished by defining a bibliography list filter using the \cmd{DeclareBiblistFilter} command. This differs from the filters defined using \cmd{defbibfilter} (see \secref{use:bib:flt}) since the filters defined by \cmd{defbibfilter} run inside \biblatex after the \file{.bbl} has been generated. In addition, bibliography lists in the \file{.bbl} do not contain entry data, only the citation keys for the entries and so no filtering by \biblatex using \cmd{defbibfilter} is possible for bibliography lists.
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+\cmditem{DeclareBiblistFilter}{name}{specification}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Defines a bibliography list filter with \prm{name}. The \prm{specification} consists of one or more \cmd{filter} or \cmd{filteror} macros, all of which must be satisfied for the entry to pass the filter:
+
+\cmditem{filter}{type}{filter}
+
+Filter entries according to the \prm{type} and \prm{filter}. \prm{type} can be one of:
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
+\begin{description}
+\item[type/nottype] Entry is/is not of \bibfield{entrytype} \prm{filter}
+\item[subtype/notsubtype] Entry is/is not of \bibfield{subtype} \prm{filter}
+\item[keyword/notkeyword] Entry has/does not have \bibfield{keyword} \prm{filter}
+\item[field/notfield] Entry has/does not have a field called \prm{filter}
+\end{description}
+
+\begin{ltxsyntax}
+\cmditem{filteror}{type}{filters}
+
+A wrapper around one or more \cmd{filter} commands specifying that they form a disjunctive set, i.e. any one of the \prm{filters} must be satisfied.
+
+\end{ltxsyntax}
+
+Fields in the datamodel which are marked as <Label fields> (see \secref{aut:ctm:dm}) automatically have a filter defined for them with the same name and which filters out any entries which do no contain the field. For example, \biblatex automatically generates a filter for the \bibfield{shorthand} field:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\DeclareBiblistFilter{<<shorthand>>}{
+  \filter[type=field,filter=shorthand]
+}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
 \subsubsection{Controlling Name Initials Generation}
 \label{aut:ctm:noinit}
 
@@ -7096,12 +7284,12 @@ If there is no \cmd{DeclareNoinit} specification, \biber will default to:
 \DeclareNoinit{
   % strip lowercase prefixes like 'al-' when generating initials from names
   \noinit{\regexp{<<\b\p{Ll}{2}\p{Pd}>>}}
-  % strip diacritics when generating initials from names
+  % strip some common diacritics when generating initials from names
   \noinit{\regexp{<<[\x{2bf}\x{2018}]>>}}
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-This \biber default strips diacritics and lowercase prefixes from names before generating initials.
+This \biber default strips a couple of diacritics and also strips lowercase prefixes from names before generating initials.
 
 \subsubsection{Fine Tuning Sorting}
 \label{aut:ctm:nosort}
@@ -7126,12 +7314,12 @@ If there is no \cmd{DeclareNosort} specification, \biber will default to:
 \DeclareNosort{
   % strip prefixes like 'al-' when sorting names
   \nosort{type_names}{\regexp{<<\A\p{L}{2}\p{Pd}>>}}
-  % strip diacritics when sorting names
+  % strip some diacritics when sorting names
   \nosort{type_names}{\regexp{<<[\x{2bf}\x{2018}]>>}}
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-This \biber default strips diacritics and prefixes from names when sorting. Suppose you wanted to ignore «The» at the beginning of a \bibfield{title} field when sorting:
+This \biber default strips a couple of diacritics and also strips prefixes from names when sorting. Suppose you wanted to ignore «The» at the beginning of a \bibfield{title} field when sorting:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareNosort{
@@ -7277,7 +7465,9 @@ Defines an inheritance rule by mapping a \prm{source} field to a \prm{target} fi
 
 Unconditionally prevents inheritance of the \prm{source} field.
 
-\csitem{ResetDataInheritance}\BiberOnlyMark Clears all inheritance rules defined with \cmd{DeclareDataInheritance}. This command may only be used in the preamble.
+\csitem{ResetDataInheritance}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Clears all inheritance rules defined with \cmd{DeclareDataInheritance}. This command may only be used in the preamble.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -7619,11 +7809,11 @@ This command is similar to \cmd{ifopcit} except that it also compares the \prm{p
 
 \cmditem{iffirstonpage}{true}{false}
 
-The behavior of this command is responsive to the package option \opt{pagetracker}. If the option is set to \texttt{page}, it expands to \prm{true} if the current item is the first one on the page, and to \prm{false} otherwise. If the option is set to \texttt{spread}, it expands to \prm{true} if the current item is the first one on the double-page spread, and to \prm{false} otherwise. If the page tracker is disabled, this test always yields \prm{false}. Depending on the context, the <item> may be a citation or an entry in the bibliography or the list of shorthands. Note that this test distinguishes between body text and footnotes. For example, if used in the first footnote on a page, it will expand to \prm{true} even if there is a citation in the body text prior to the footnote. Also see the \cmd{pagetrackertrue} and \cmd{pagetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
+The behavior of this command is responsive to the package option \opt{pagetracker}. If the option is set to \texttt{page}, it expands to \prm{true} if the current item is the first one on the page, and to \prm{false} otherwise. If the option is set to \texttt{spread}, it expands to \prm{true} if the current item is the first one on the double-page spread, and to \prm{false} otherwise. If the page tracker is disabled, this test always yields \prm{false}. Depending on the context, the <item> may be a citation or an entry in the bibliography or a bibliography list. Note that this test distinguishes between body text and footnotes. For example, if used in the first footnote on a page, it will expand to \prm{true} even if there is a citation in the body text prior to the footnote. Also see the \cmd{pagetrackertrue} and \cmd{pagetrackerfalse} switches in \secref{aut:aux:msc}.
 
 \cmditem{ifsamepage}{instance 1}{instance 2}{true}{false}
 
-This command expands to \prm{true} if two instances of a reference are located on the same page or double-page spread, and to \prm{false} otherwise. An instance of a reference may be a citation or an entry in the bibliography or the list of shorthands. These instances are identified by the value of the \cnt{instcount} counter, see \secref{aut:fmt:ilc}. The behavior of this command is responsive to the package option \opt{pagetracker}. If this option is set to \texttt{spread}, \cmd{ifsamepage} is in fact an <if same spread> test. If the page tracker is disabled, this test always yields \prm{false}. The arguments \prm{instance 1} and \prm{instance 2} are treated as integer expressions in the sense of \etex's \cmd{numexpr}. This implies that it is possible to make calculations within these arguments, for example:
+This command expands to \prm{true} if two instances of a reference are located on the same page or double-page spread, and to \prm{false} otherwise. An instance of a reference may be a citation or an entry in the bibliography or a bibliography list. These instances are identified by the value of the \cnt{instcount} counter, see \secref{aut:fmt:ilc}. The behavior of this command is responsive to the package option \opt{pagetracker}. If this option is set to \texttt{spread}, \cmd{ifsamepage} is in fact an <if same spread> test. If the page tracker is disabled, this test always yields \prm{false}. The arguments \prm{instance 1} and \prm{instance 2} are treated as integer expressions in the sense of \etex's \cmd{numexpr}. This implies that it is possible to make calculations within these arguments, for example:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \ifsamepage{<<\value>>{instcount}}{<<\value>>{instcount}<<-1>>}{true}{false}
@@ -7681,7 +7871,7 @@ Expands to \prm{true} if a driver for the \prm{entrytype} is available, and to \
 
 \cmditem{ifcapital}{true}{false}
 
-Executes \prm{true} if \sty{biblatex}'s punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust. It may be useful for conditional capitalization of certain parts of a name in a formatting directive.
+Executes \prm{true} if \biblatex's punctuation tracker would capitalize a localization string at the current location, and \prm{false} otherwise. This command is robust. It may be useful for conditional capitalization of certain parts of a name in a formatting directive.
 
 \cmditem{ifcitation}{true}{false}
 
@@ -7711,10 +7901,10 @@ Expands to \prm{true} when located in a footnote, and to \prm{false} otherwise.
 
 This counter indicates how many times the entry currently being processed is cited in the current reference section. Note that this feature needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{citecounter}. If the option is set to \texttt{context}, citations in the body text and in footnotes are counted separately. In this case, \cnt{citecounter} will hold the value of the context it is used in.
 
-\cntitem{uniquename}\BiberOnlyMark
+\cntitem{uniquename}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This counter refers to the \bibfield{labelname} list. It is set on a per-name basis. Its value is \texttt{0} if the last name is unique, \texttt{1} if adding the other parts of the name (first name, prefix, suffix) as initials will make it unique, and \texttt{2} if the full name is required to disambiguate the name. This information is required by author-year and author-title citation schemes which add additional parts of the name when citing different authors with the same last name. For example, if there is one <John Doe> and one <Edward Doe> in the list of references, this counter will be set to \texttt{1}. If there is one <John Doe> and one <Jane Doe>, the value of the counter will be \texttt{2}. If the option is set to \texttt{init}\slash \texttt{allinit}\slash \texttt{mininit}, the counter will be limited to \texttt{1}. This is useful for citations styles which use initials to disambiguate names but never print the full name in citations. If adding the initials is not sufficient to disambiguate the name, \cnt{uniquename} will also be set to \texttt{0} for that name. This feature needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{uniquename}. Note that the \cnt{uniquename} counter is local to \cmd{printnames} and that it is only set for the \bibfield{labelname} list and to the name list \bibfield{labelname} has been derived from (typically \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor}). Its value is zero in any other context, i.e., it must be evaluated in the name formatting directives handling name lists. See \secref{aut:cav:amb} for further details and practical examples.
 
-\cntitem{uniquelist}\BiberOnlyMark
+\cntitem{uniquelist}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This counter refers to the \bibfield{labelname} list. It is set on a per-field basis. Its value indicates the number of names required to disambiguate the name list if automatic \cnt{maxnames}\slash \cnt{minnames} truncation would lead to ambiguous citations. For example, if there is one work by <Doe\slash Smith\slash Johnson> and another one by <Doe\slash Edwards\slash Williams>, setting \kvopt{maxnames}{1} would lead to <Doe et al.> in both cases. In this case, \cnt{uniquelist} would be set to \texttt{2} on the \bibfield{labelname} lists of both entries because at least the first two names are required to disambiguate them. Note that the \cnt{uniquelist} counter is local to \cmd{printnames} and that it is only set for the \bibfield{labelname} list and to the name list \bibfield{labelname} has been derived from (typically \bibfield{author} or \bibfield{editor}). Its value is zero in any other context. If available, the \cnt{uniquelist} value will be used automatically by \cmd{printnames} when processing the name list, \ie it will automatically override \cnt{maxnames}\slash \cnt{minnames}. This feature needs to be enabled explicitly with the package option \opt{uniquelist}. See \secref{aut:cav:amb} for further details and practical examples.
 
 \cntitem{parenlevel}
@@ -7762,7 +7952,7 @@ The tests introduced in \secref{aut:aux:tst} may also be used with the \cmd{ifbo
   {...}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The additional tests provided by \sty{biblatex} are only available when \cmd{ifboolexpr} or \cmd{ifthenelse} are used in citation commands and in the bibliography.
+The additional tests provided by \biblatex are only available when \cmd{ifboolexpr} or \cmd{ifthenelse} are used in citation commands and in the bibliography.
 
 \end{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -7844,7 +8034,7 @@ A wrapper for \sty{hyperref}'s \cmd{hyperlink} command. The \prm{name} is the na
 
 \cmditem{bibhyperref}[entrykey]{text}
 
-Transforms \prm{text} into an internal link pointing to \prm{entrykey} in the bibliography. If \prm{entrykey} is omitted, this command uses the key of the entry currently being processed. This command is employed to transform citations into clickable links pointing to the corresponding entry in the bibliography. The link target is marked automatically by \sty{biblatex}. If there are multiple bibliographies in a document, the target will be the first occurence of \prm{entrykey} in one of the bibliographies. If there are \env{refsection} environments, the links are local to the environment. See also the formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperref} in \secref{aut:fmt:ich}.
+Transforms \prm{text} into an internal link pointing to \prm{entrykey} in the bibliography. If \prm{entrykey} is omitted, this command uses the key of the entry currently being processed. This command is employed to transform citations into clickable links pointing to the corresponding entry in the bibliography. The link target is marked automatically by \biblatex. If there are multiple bibliographies in a document, the target will be the first occurence of \prm{entrykey} in one of the bibliographies. If there are \env{refsection} environments, the links are local to the environment. See also the formatting directive \texttt{bibhyperref} in \secref{aut:fmt:ich}.
 
 \cmditem{ifhyperref}{true}{false}
 
@@ -7947,7 +8137,7 @@ The optional argument \bibfield{bookpagination} is omissible in this case.
 \cmditem{mkcomprange}[postpro]{text}
 \cmditem*{mkcomprange*}[postpro]{text}
 
-This command, which is intended for use in field formatting directives, will parse its \prm{text} argument for page ranges and compress them. For example, «125--129» may be formatted as «125--9». You may configure the behavior of \cmd{mkcomprange} by adjusting the \latex counters \cnt{mincomprange}, \cnt{maxcomprange}, and \cnt{mincompwidth}, as illustrated in \tabref{aut:aux:tab1}. The default settings are \texttt{10}, \texttt{100000}, and \texttt{1}, respectively. This means that the command tries to compress as much as possible by default. Use \cmd{setcounter} to adjust the parameters. The scanner recognizes \cmd{bibrangedash} and hyphens as range dashes. It will normalize the dash by replacing any number of consecutive hyphens with \cmd{bibrangedash}. Lists of ranges delimited with \cmd{bibrangessep} (\biber\footnote{\biber will always convert commas/semicolon multi-range separators into \cmd{bibrangessep} so that it can be controlled in the style.}) or commas/semicolons (BibTeX) are also supported. If you want to hide a character from the list/range scanner for some reason, wrap the character or the entire string in curly braces. The optional \prm{postpro} argument specifies a macro to be used for post-processing the \prm{text}. This is important if you want to combine \cmd{mkcomprange} with other formatting macros which also need to parse their \prm{text} argument, such as \cmd{mkpageprefix}. Simply nesting these commands will not work as expected. Use the \prm{postpro} argument to set up the processing chain as follows:
+This command, which is intended for use in field formatting directives, will parse its \prm{text} argument for page ranges and compress them. For example, «125--129» may be formatted as «125--9». You may configure the behavior of \cmd{mkcomprange} by adjusting the \latex counters \cnt{mincomprange}, \cnt{maxcomprange}, and \cnt{mincompwidth}, as illustrated in \tabref{aut:aux:tab1}. The default settings are \texttt{10}, \texttt{100000}, and \texttt{1}, respectively. This means that the command tries to compress as much as possible by default. Use \cmd{setcounter} to adjust the parameters. The scanner recognizes \cmd{bibrangedash} and hyphens as range dashes. It will normalize the dash by replacing any number of consecutive hyphens with \cmd{bibrangedash}. Lists of ranges delimited with \cmd{bibrangessep} (\biber\footnote{\biber will always convert commas/semicolon multi-range separators into \cmd{bibrangessep} so that it can be controlled in the style.}) or commas/semicolons (BibTeX) are also supported. With \biber, The scanner will normalise any comma or semi-colons surrounded by optional space by replacing them with \cmd{bibrangessep}. If you want to hide a character from the list/range scanner for some reason, wrap the character or the entire string in curly braces. The optional \prm{postpro} argument specifies a macro to be used for post-processing the \prm{text}. This is important if you want to combine \cmd{mkcomprange} with other formatting macros which also need to parse their \prm{text} argument, such as \cmd{mkpageprefix}. Simply nesting these commands will not work as expected. Use the \prm{postpro} argument to set up the processing chain as follows:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{\mkcomprange[<<{>>\mkpageprefix[pagination]<<}>>]{#1}}
@@ -8085,7 +8275,7 @@ These commands activate or deactivate the \texttt{backref} tracker locally. They
 \subsection[Punctuation]{Punctuation and Spacing}
 \label{aut:pct}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides elaborate facilities designed to manage and track punctuation and spacing in the bibliography and in citations. These facilities work on two levels. The high"=level commands discussed in \secref{aut:pct:new} deal with punctuation and whitespace inserted by the bibliography style between the individual segments of a bibliography entry. The commands in \secref{aut:pct:chk, aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc} work at a lower level. They use \tex's space factor and modified space factor codes to track punctuation in a robust and efficient way. This way it is possible to detect trailing punctuation marks within fields, not only those explicitly inserted between fields. The same technique is also used for automatic capitalization of localization strings, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} as well as \secref{aut:str} for details. Note that these facilities are only made available locally in citations and bibliographies. They will not affect any other part of a document.
+The \biblatex package provides elaborate facilities designed to manage and track punctuation and spacing in the bibliography and in citations. These facilities work on two levels. The high"=level commands discussed in \secref{aut:pct:new} deal with punctuation and whitespace inserted by the bibliography style between the individual segments of a bibliography entry. The commands in \secref{aut:pct:chk, aut:pct:pct, aut:pct:spc} work at a lower level. They use \tex's space factor and modified space factor codes to track punctuation in a robust and efficient way. This way it is possible to detect trailing punctuation marks within fields, not only those explicitly inserted between fields. The same technique is also used for automatic capitalization of localization strings, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} as well as \secref{aut:str} for details. Note that these facilities are only made available locally in citations and bibliographies. They will not affect any other part of a document.
 
 \subsubsection{Block and Unit Punctuation}
 \label{aut:pct:new}
@@ -8118,7 +8308,7 @@ The \cmd{printunit} command is similar to \cmd{setunit} except that \prm{punctua
 
 \cmditem{setpunctfont}{command}
 
-This command, which is intended for use in field formatting directives, provides an alternative way of dealing with unit punctuation after a field printed in a different font (for example, a title printed in italics). The standard \latex way of dealing with this is adding a small amount of space, the so-called italic correction. This command allows adapting the punctuation to the font of the preceding field. The \prm{command} should be a text font command which takes one argument, such as \cmd{emph} or \cmd{textbf}. This command will only affect punctuation marks inserted by one of the commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct}. The font adaption is applied to the next punctuation mark only and will be reset automatically thereafter. If you want to reset it manually before it takes effect, issue \cmd{resetpunctfont}. If the \opt{punctfont} package option is disabled, this command does nothing. Note that the \cmd{mkbibemph} and \cmd{mkbibbold} wrappers from \secref{aut:fmt:ich} incorporate this feature by default.
+This command, which is intended for use in field formatting directives, provides an alternative way of dealing with unit punctuation after a field printed in a different font (for example, a title printed in italics). The standard \latex way of dealing with this is adding a small amount of space, the so-called italic correction. This command allows adapting the punctuation to the font of the preceding field. The \prm{command} should be a text font command which takes one argument, such as \cmd{emph} or \cmd{textbf}. This command will only affect punctuation marks inserted by one of the commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct}. The font adaption is applied to the next punctuation mark only and will be reset automatically thereafter. If you want to reset it manually before it takes effect, issue \cmd{resetpunctfont}. If the \opt{punctfont} package option is disabled, this command does nothing. Note that the \cmd{mkbibemph}, \cmd{mkbibitalic} and \cmd{mkbibbold}  wrappers from \secref{aut:fmt:ich} incorporate this feature by default.
 
 \csitem{resetpunctfont}
 
@@ -8150,7 +8340,7 @@ Executes \prm{true} if preceded by the punctuation mark \prm{character}, and \pr
 \subsubsection{Adding Punctuation}
 \label{aut:pct:pct}
 
-The following commands are designed to prevent double punctuation marks. Bibliography and citation styles should always use these commands instead of literal punctuation marks. All \cmd{add...} commands in this section automatically remove preceding whitespace with \cmd{unspace} (see \secref{aut:pct:spc}). Note that the behavior of all \cmd{add...} commands discussed below is the package default, which is restored whenever \sty{biblatex} switches languages. This behavior may be adjusted with \cmd{DeclarePunctuationPairs} from \secref{aut:pct:cfg}.
+The following commands are designed to prevent double punctuation marks. Bibliography and citation styles should always use these commands instead of literal punctuation marks. All \cmd{add...} commands in this section automatically remove preceding whitespace with \cmd{unspace} (see \secref{aut:pct:spc}). Note that the behavior of all \cmd{add...} commands discussed below is the package default, which is restored whenever \biblatex switches languages. This behavior may be adjusted with \cmd{DeclarePunctuationPairs} from \secref{aut:pct:cfg}.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -8273,7 +8463,7 @@ This definition is restored automatically whenever the \opt{autopunct} package o
 
 \cmditem{DeclareCapitalPunctuation}{characters}
 
-When \sty{biblatex} inserts localization strings, \ie key terms such as <edition> or <volume>, it automatically capitalizes them after terminal punctuation marks. This command defines the punctuation marks which will cause localization strings to be capitalized if one of them precedes a string. Note that \prm{characters} is an undelimited list of characters. Valid \prm{characters} are period, comma, semicolon, colon, exclamation and question mark. The package default is:
+When \biblatex inserts localization strings, \ie key terms such as <edition> or <volume>, it automatically capitalizes them after terminal punctuation marks. This command defines the punctuation marks which will cause localization strings to be capitalized if one of them precedes a string. Note that \prm{characters} is an undelimited list of characters. Valid \prm{characters} are period, comma, semicolon, colon, exclamation and question mark. The package default is:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareCapitalPunctuation{.!?}
@@ -8289,7 +8479,7 @@ Use this command to declare valid pairs of punctuation marks. This will affect t
 \DeclarePunctuationPairs{comma}{*!?}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The \prm{identifier} selects the command to be configured. The identifiers correspond to the names of the punctuation commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct} without the \cmd{add} prefix, \ie valid \prm{identifier} strings are \texttt{dot}, \texttt{comma}, \texttt{semicolon}, \texttt{colon}, \texttt{period}, \texttt{exclam}, \texttt{question}. The \prm{characters} argument is an undelimited list of punctuation marks. Valid \prm{characters} are comma, semicolon, colon, period, exclamation mark, question mark, and asterisk. A period in the \prm{characters} argument denotes an end-of"=sentence period, an asterisk the dot after an abbreviation. This is the default setup, which is automatically restored whenever \sty{biblatex} switches languages and corresponds to the behavior described in \secref{aut:pct:pct}:
+The \prm{identifier} selects the command to be configured. The identifiers correspond to the names of the punctuation commands from \secref{aut:pct:pct} without the \cmd{add} prefix, \ie valid \prm{identifier} strings are \texttt{dot}, \texttt{comma}, \texttt{semicolon}, \texttt{colon}, \texttt{period}, \texttt{exclam}, \texttt{question}. The \prm{characters} argument is an undelimited list of punctuation marks. Valid \prm{characters} are comma, semicolon, colon, period, exclamation mark, question mark, and asterisk. A period in the \prm{characters} argument denotes an end-of"=sentence period, an asterisk the dot after an abbreviation. This is the default setup, which is automatically restored whenever \biblatex switches languages and corresponds to the behavior described in \secref{aut:pct:pct}:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclarePunctuationPairs{dot}{}
@@ -8347,7 +8537,7 @@ The starred variant of \cmd{midsentence} differs from the regular one in that a
 \subsection{Localization Strings}
 \label{aut:str}
 
-Localization strings are key terms such as <edition> or <volume> which are automatically translated by \sty{biblatex}'s localization modules. See \secref{aut:lng} for an overview and \secref{aut:lng:key} for a list of all strings supported by default. The commands in this section are used to print the localized term.
+Localization strings are key terms such as <edition> or <volume> which are automatically translated by \biblatex's localization modules. See \secref{aut:lng} for an overview and \secref{aut:lng:key} for a list of all strings supported by default. The commands in this section are used to print the localized term.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
@@ -8422,7 +8612,7 @@ Switches from the current language to the main document language. This can be us
 \subsection{Localization Modules}
 \label{aut:lng}
 
-A localization module provides translations for key terms such as <edition> or <volume> as well as definitions for language specific features such as the date format and ordinals. These definitions are provided in files with the suffix \file{lbx}. The base name of the file must be a language name known to the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} packages. The \file{lbx} files may also be used to map \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language names to the backend modules of the \sty{biblatex} package. All localization modules are loaded on demand in the document body. Note that the contents of the file are processed in a group and that the category code of the character \texttt{@} is temporarily set to <letter>.
+A localization module provides translations for key terms such as <edition> or <volume> as well as definitions for language specific features such as the date format and ordinals. These definitions are provided in files with the suffix \file{lbx}. The base name of the file must be a language name known to the \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} packages. The \file{lbx} files may also be used to map \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language names to the backend modules of the \biblatex package. All localization modules are loaded on demand in the document body. Note that the contents of the file are processed in a group and that the category code of the character \texttt{@} is temporarily set to <letter>.
 
 \subsubsection{Localization Commands}
 \label{aut:lng:cmd}
@@ -8444,7 +8634,7 @@ This command is only available in \file{lbx} files. It is used to define localiz
 }
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-The first value is the long, written out expression, the second one is an abbreviated or short form. Both strings must always be given even though they may be identical if an expression is always (or never) abbreviated. Depending on the setting of the \opt{abbreviate} package option (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}), \sty{biblatex} selects one expression when loading the \file{lbx} file. There is also a special key named \texttt{inherit} which copies the strings from a different language. This is intended for languages which only differ in a few expressions, such as German and Austrian or American and British English. For example, here are the complete definitions for Austrian:
+The first value is the long, written out expression, the second one is an abbreviated or short form. Both strings must always be given even though they may be identical if an expression is always (or never) abbreviated. Depending on the setting of the \opt{abbreviate} package option (see \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}), \biblatex selects one expression when loading the \file{lbx} file. There is also a special key named \texttt{inherit} which copies the strings from a different language. This is intended for languages which only differ in a few expressions, such as German and Austrian or American and British English. For example, here are the complete definitions for Austrian:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareBibliographyStrings{%
@@ -8464,7 +8654,7 @@ The above examples are slightly simplified. Real localization files should use t
   mathesis         = {{Master's thesis}{MA\addabbrvspace thesis}},
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Note the handling of abbreviation dots, the spacing in abbreviated expressions, and the capitalization in the example above. All expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. The \sty{biblatex} package will automatically capitalize the first word when required at the beginning of a sentence, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details. Expressions intended for use in headings are special. They should be capitalized in a way that is suitable for titling and should not be abbreviated (but they may have a short form).
+Note the handling of abbreviation dots, the spacing in abbreviated expressions, and the capitalization in the example above. All expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. The \biblatex package will automatically capitalize the first word when required at the beginning of a sentence, see \cmd{DeclareCapitalPunctuation} in \secref{aut:pct:cfg} for details. Expressions intended for use in headings are special. They should be capitalized in a way that is suitable for titling and should not be abbreviated (but they may have a short form).
 
 \cmditem{InheritBibliographyStrings}{language}
 
@@ -8498,7 +8688,7 @@ The \prm{language} is the string given in the \bibfield{language} field (without
 	canadian,australian,newzealand,USenglish,UKenglish}
 \end{lstlisting}
 %
-Note that this feature needs to be enabled globally with the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. If it is disabled, all mappings will be ignored. If the \prm{langid} parameter is blank, \sty{biblatex} will clear the mappings for the corresponding \prm{language}, \ie the feature will be disabled for this \prm{language} only.
+Note that this feature needs to be enabled globally with the \opt{clearlang} option from \secref{use:opt:pre:gen}. If it is disabled, all mappings will be ignored. If the \prm{langid} parameter is blank, \biblatex will clear the mappings for the corresponding \prm{language}, \ie the feature will be disabled for this \prm{language} only.
 
 \cmditem{DeclareLanguageMapping}{language}{file}
 
@@ -8513,17 +8703,17 @@ This command, which may be used in the preamble (including \file{cbx} and \file{
 \subsubsection{Localization Keys}
 \label{aut:lng:key}
 
-The localization keys in this section are defined by default and covered by the localization files which come with \sty{biblatex}. Note that these strings are only available in citations, the bibliography, and the list of shorthands. All expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. \sty{biblatex} will capitalize them automatically at the beginning of a sentence. The only exceptions to these rules are the three strings intended for use in headings.
+The localization keys in this section are defined by default and covered by the localization files which come with \biblatex. Note that these strings are only available in citations, the bibliography and bibliography lists. All expressions should be capitalized as they usually are when used in the middle of a sentence. \biblatex will capitalize them automatically at the beginning of a sentence. The only exceptions to these rules are the three strings intended for use in headings.
 
 \paragraph{Headings}
 \label{aut:lng:key:bhd}
 
-The following strings are special because they are intended for use in headings and made available globally via macros. For this reason, they should be capitalized for use in headings and they must not include any local commands which are part of \sty{biblatex}'s author interface.
+The following strings are special because they are intended for use in headings and made available globally via macros. For this reason, they should be capitalized for use in headings and they must not include any local commands which are part of \biblatex's author interface.
 
 \begin{keymarglist}
 \item[bibliography] The term <bibliography>, also available as \cmd{bibname}.
 \item[references] The term <references>, also available as \cmd{refname}.
-\item[shorthands] The term <list of shorthands> or <list of abbreviations>, also available as \cmd{losname}.
+\item[shorthands] The term <list of shorthands> or <list of abbreviations>, also available as \cmd{biblistname}.
 \end{keymarglist}
 
 \paragraph{Roles, Expressed as Functions}
@@ -8983,6 +9173,7 @@ Other expressions frequently used in citations:
 \item[langpolish] The language <Polish>.
 \item[langportuguese] The language <Portuguese>.
 \item[langrussian] The language <Russian>.
+\item[langslovene] The language <Slovene>.
 \item[langspanish] The language <Spanish>.
 \item[langswedish] The language <Swedish>.
 \end{keymarglist}
@@ -9008,6 +9199,7 @@ The following strings are intended for use in phrases like <translated from [the
 \item[frompolish] The expression <from [the] Polish>.
 \item[fromportuguese] The expression <from [the] Portuguese>.
 \item[fromrussian] The expression <from [the] Russian>.
+\item[fromslovene] The expression <from [the] Slovene>.
 \item[fromspanish] The expression <from [the] Spanish>.
 \item[fromswedish] The expression <from [the] Swedish>.
 \end{keymarglist}
@@ -9063,10 +9255,10 @@ This section corresponds to \secref{use:fmt:fmt} in the user part of the manual.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelima}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibnamedelima}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This delimiter controls the spacing between the elements which make up a name part. It is inserted automatically by the backend after the first name element if the element is less than three characters long and before the last element. The default definition is \cmd{addhighpenspace}, \ie a space penalized by the value of the \cnt{highnamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelimb}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibnamedelimb}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 This delimiter controls the spacing between the elements which make up a name part. It is inserted automatically by the backend between all name elements where \cmd{bibnamedelima} does not apply. The default definition is \cmd{addlowpenspace}, \ie a space penalized by the value of the \cnt{lownamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
 \csitem{bibnamedelimc}
@@ -9075,16 +9267,16 @@ This delimiter controls the spacing between name parts. The default name formats
 \csitem{bibnamedelimd}
 This delimiter controls the spacing between name parts. The default name formats use it between all name parts where \cmd{bibnamedelimc} does not apply. The default definition is \cmd{addlowpenspace}, \ie a space penalized by the value of the \cnt{lownamepenalty} counter (\secref{use:fmt:len}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibnamedelimi}\BiberOnlyMark
-This delimiter replaces \cmd{bibnamedelima/b} after initials. Note that this only applies to initials given as such in the \file{bib} file, not to the initials automatically generated by \sty{biblatex} which use their own set of delimiters.
+\csitem{bibnamedelimi}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+This delimiter replaces \cmd{bibnamedelima/b} after initials. Note that this only applies to initials given as such in the \file{bib} file, not to the initials automatically generated by \biblatex which use their own set of delimiters.
 
-\csitem{bibinitperiod}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinitperiod}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The punctuation inserted automatically by the backend after all initials unless \cmd{bibinithyphendelim} applies. The default definition is a period (\cmd{adddot}). Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibinitdelim}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinitdelim}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The spacing inserted automatically by the backend between multiple initials unless \cmd{bibinithyphendelim} applies. The default definition is an unbreakable interword space. Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
-\csitem{bibinithyphendelim}\BiberOnlyMark
+\csitem{bibinithyphendelim}|\BiberOnlyMark|
 The punctuation inserted automatically by the backend between the initials of hyphenated name parts, replacing \cmd{bibinitperiod} and \cmd{bibinitdelim}. The default definition is a period followed by an unbreakable hyphen. Please refer to \secref{use:cav:nam} for further details.
 
 \csitem{bibindexnamedelima}
@@ -9294,7 +9486,7 @@ The penalty used by \cmd{addhighpenspace} and \cmd{addhpthinspace}, see \secref{
 
 \cntitem{biburlnumpenalty}
 
-If this counter is set to a value greater than zero, \sty{biblatex} will permit linebreaks after numbers in all strings formatted with the \cmd{url} command from the \sty{url} package. This will affect \acr{url}s and \acr{doi}s in the bibliography. The breakpoints will be penalized by the value of this counter. If \acr{url}s and/or \acr{doi}s in the bibliography run into the margin, try setting this counter to a value greater than zero but less than 10000 (you normally want to use a high value like 9000). Setting the counter to zero disables this feature. This is the default setting.
+If this counter is set to a value greater than zero, \biblatex will permit linebreaks after numbers in all strings formatted with the \cmd{url} command from the \sty{url} package. This will affect \acr{url}s and \acr{doi}s in the bibliography. The breakpoints will be penalized by the value of this counter. If \acr{url}s and/or \acr{doi}s in the bibliography run into the margin, try setting this counter to a value greater than zero but less than 10000 (you normally want to use a high value like 9000). Setting the counter to zero disables this feature. This is the default setting.
 
 \cntitem{biburlucpenalty}
 
@@ -9309,13 +9501,17 @@ Similar to \cnt{biburlnumpenalty}, except that it will add a breakpoint after al
 \subsubsection{Auxiliary Commands and Hooks}
 \label{aut:fmt:ich}
 
-The auxiliary commands and facilities in this section serve a special purpose. Some of them are used by \sty{biblatex} to communicate with bibliography and citation styles in some way or other.
+The auxiliary commands and facilities in this section serve a special purpose. Some of them are used by \biblatex to communicate with bibliography and citation styles in some way or other.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
 \cmditem{mkbibemph}{text}
 
-A generic command which prints its argument in italics. This is a simple wrapper around the standard \cmd{emph} command. Apart from that, it uses \cmd{setpunctfont} from \secref{aut:pct:new} to adapt the font of the next punctuation mark following the text set in italics. If the \opt{punctfont} package option is disabled, this command behaves like \cmd{emph}.
+A generic command which prints its argument as emphasized text. This is a simple wrapper around the standard \cmd{emph} command. Apart from that, it uses \cmd{setpunctfont} from \secref{aut:pct:new} to adapt the font of the next punctuation mark following the text set in italics. If the \opt{punctfont} package option is disabled, this command behaves like \cmd{emph}.
+
+\cmditem{mkbibitalic}{text}
+
+Similar in concept to \cmd{mkbibemph} but prints italicized text. This is a simple wrapper around the standard \cmd{textit} command which incorporates \cmd{setpunctfont}. If the \opt{punctfont} package option is disabled, this command behaves like \cmd{textit}.
 
 \cmditem{mkbibbold}{text}
 
@@ -9393,9 +9589,13 @@ This command strips leading zeros from a number or preserves them, depending on
 
 This command strips leading zeros from a number. It is intended for date formatting and ordinals.
 
-\optitem{shorthandwidth}
+\optitem{shorthandwidth}\BibTeXOnlyMark 
 
-A special field formatting directive which is used internally by \sty{biblatex}. When the bibliographic data is read from the \file{bbl} file, \sty{biblatex} measures the values of all \bibfield{shorthand} fields and sets the length register \cmd{shorthandwidth} to the width of the widest shorthand (see \secref{aut:fmt:ilc}). In order to determine the correct width, the package considers two factors: the definition of \cmd{bibfont} and this formatting directive. All styles should adjust this directive such that it corresponds to the format used in the list of shorthands.
+A special field formatting directive which is used internally by \biblatex. When the bibliographic data is read from the \file{bbl} file, \biblatex measures the values of all \bibfield{shorthand} fields and sets the length register \cmd{shorthandwidth} to the width of the widest shorthand (see \secref{aut:fmt:ilc}). In order to determine the correct width, the package considers two factors: the definition of \cmd{bibfont} and this formatting directive. All styles should adjust this directive such that it corresponds to the format used in the list of shorthands.
+
+\optitem{<labelfield>width}|\BiberOnlyMark| 
+
+With \biber, for every field marked as a <Label field> in the data model, a formatting directive is created as per \texttt{shorthandwidth} above. Since \bibfield{shorthand} is so marked in the default data model, this functionality is a superset of that described for \texttt{shorthandwidth}.
 
 \optitem{labelnumberwidth}
 
@@ -9450,14 +9650,18 @@ Similar to \texttt{date} but controls the format of \cmd{printeventdate}.
 \subsubsection{Auxiliary Lengths, Counters, and Other Features}
 \label{aut:fmt:ilc}
 
-The length registers and counters discussed here are used by \sty{biblatex} to pass information to bibliography and citation styles. Think of them as read"=only registers. Note that all counters are \latex counters. Use |\value{counter}| to read out the current value.
+The length registers and counters discussed here are used by \biblatex to pass information to bibliography and citation styles. Think of them as read"=only registers. Note that all counters are \latex counters. Use |\value{counter}| to read out the current value.
 
 \begin{ltxsyntax}
 
-\lenitem{shorthandwidth}
+\lenitem{shorthandwidth}\BibTeXOnlyMark
 
 This length register indicates the width of the widest \bibfield{shorthand}. Bibliography styles should incorporate this length in the definition of the list of shorthands, if applicable.
 
+\lenitem{<labelfield>width}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+With \biber, for every field marked as a <Label field> in the data model, a length register is created as per \texttt{shorthandwidth} above. Since \bibfield{shorthand} is so marked in the default data model, this functionality is a superset of that described for \texttt{shorthandwidth}.
+
 \lenitem{labelnumberwidth}
 
 This length register indicates the width of the widest \bibfield{labelnumber}. Numeric bibliography styles 
@@ -9501,7 +9705,7 @@ This counter holds the setting of the \opt{minitems} package option.
 
 \cntitem{instcount}
 
-This counter is incremented by \sty{biblatex} for every citation as well as for every entry in the bibliography and the list of shorthands. The value of this counter uniquely identifies a single instance of a reference in the document.
+This counter is incremented by \biblatex for every citation as well as for every entry in the bibliography and bibliography lists. The value of this counter uniquely identifies a single instance of a reference in the document.
 
 \cntitem{citetotal}
 
@@ -9562,6 +9766,16 @@ Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of the bibl
 
 Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of the list of shorthands. The \prm{code} is executed at the beginning of the list of shorthands, immediately after the \prm{begin code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment}. This command may only be used in the preamble.
 
+When using \biber, this is just an alias for:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\AtBeginBiblist{shorthand}{code}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\cmditem{AtBeginBiblist}{biblistname}{code}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of the bibliography list \prm{biblistname}. The \prm{code} is executed at the beginning of the bibliography list, immediately after the \prm{begin code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment}. This command may only be used in the preamble.
+
 \cmditem{AtEveryBibitem}{code}
 
 Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of every item in the bibliography. The \prm{code} is executed immediately after the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment}. The bibliographic data of the respective entry is available at this point. This command may only be used in the preamble.
@@ -9570,6 +9784,16 @@ Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of every it
 
 Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of every item in the list of shorthands. The \prm{code} is executed immediately after the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment}. The bibliographic data of the respective entry is available at this point. This command may only be used in the preamble.
 
+When using \biber, this is just an alias for:
+
+\begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
+\AtEveryBiblistitem{shorthand}{code}
+\end{lstlisting}
+
+\cmditem{AtEveryBiblistitem}{biblistname}{code}|\BiberOnlyMark|
+
+Appends the \prm{code} to an internal hook executed at the beginning of every item in the bibliography list named \prm{biblistname}. The \prm{code} is executed immediately after the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment}. The bibliographic data of the respective entry is available at this point. This command may only be used in the preamble.
+
 \cmditem{AtNextBibliography}{code}
 
 Similar to \cmd{AtBeginBibliography} but only affecting the next \cmd{printbibliography}. The internal hook is cleared after being executed once. This command may be used in the document body.
@@ -9954,7 +10178,7 @@ If a citation is given in a float (typically in the caption of a figure or table
 \subsubsection{Mixing Programming Interfaces}
 \label{aut:cav:mif}
 
-The \sty{biblatex} package provides two main programming interfaces for style authors. The \cmd{DeclareBibliographyDriver} command, which defines a handler for an entry type, is typically used in \file{bbx} files. \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand}, which defines a new citation command, is typically used in \file{cbx} files. However, in some cases it is convenient to mix these two interfaces. For example, the \cmd{fullcite} command prints a verbose citation similar to the full bibliography entry. It is essentially defined as follows:
+The \biblatex package provides two main programming interfaces for style authors. The \cmd{DeclareBibliographyDriver} command, which defines a handler for an entry type, is typically used in \file{bbx} files. \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand}, which defines a new citation command, is typically used in \file{cbx} files. However, in some cases it is convenient to mix these two interfaces. For example, the \cmd{fullcite} command prints a verbose citation similar to the full bibliography entry. It is essentially defined as follows:
 
 \begin{lstlisting}[style=latex]{}
 \DeclareCiteCommand{\fullcite}
@@ -10257,9 +10481,9 @@ Since the alternative \file{lbx} file can inherit strings from the standard \pat
 \endinput
 \end{ltxexample}
 %
-Alternative \file{lbx} files must ensure that the localization module is complete. They will typically do so by inheriting data from the corresponding standard module. If the language \texttt{american} is mapped to \path{american-mla.lbx}, \sty{biblatex} will not load \path{american.lbx} unless this module is requested explicitly. In the above example, inheriting <strings> and <extras> will cause \sty{biblatex} to load \path{american.lbx} before applying the modifications in \path{american-mla.lbx}.
+Alternative \file{lbx} files must ensure that the localization module is complete. They will typically do so by inheriting data from the corresponding standard module. If the language \texttt{american} is mapped to \path{american-mla.lbx}, \biblatex will not load \path{american.lbx} unless this module is requested explicitly. In the above example, inheriting <strings> and <extras> will cause \biblatex to load \path{american.lbx} before applying the modifications in \path{american-mla.lbx}.
 
-Note that \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} is not intended to handle language variants (\eg American English vs. British English) or \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language aliases (\eg \texttt{USenglish} vs. \texttt{american}). For example, \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} offers the \texttt{USenglish} option which is similar to \texttt{american}. Therefore, \sty{biblatex} ships with an \path{USenglish.lbx} file which simply inherits all data from \path{american.lbx} (which in turn gets the <strings> from \path{english.lbx}). In other words, the mapping of language variants and \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language aliases happens on the file level, the point being that \sty{biblatex}'s language support can be extended simply by adding additional \file{lbx} files. There is no need for centralized mapping. If you need support for, say, Portuguese (babel/polyglossia: \file{portuges}), you create a file named \path{portuges.lbx}. If \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} offered an alias named \texttt{brasil}, you would create \path{brasil.lbx} and inherit the data from \path{portuges.lbx}. In contrast to that, the point of \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} is handling \emph{stylistic} variants like <humanities vs. natural sciences> or <\acr{mla} vs. \acr{apa}> etc. which will typically be built on top of existing \file{lbx} files.
+Note that \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} is not intended to handle language variants (\eg American English vs. British English) or \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language aliases (\eg \texttt{USenglish} vs. \texttt{american}). For example, \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} offers the \texttt{USenglish} option which is similar to \texttt{american}. Therefore, \biblatex ships with an \path{USenglish.lbx} file which simply inherits all data from \path{american.lbx} (which in turn gets the <strings> from \path{english.lbx}). In other words, the mapping of language variants and \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} language aliases happens on the file level, the point being that \biblatex's language support can be extended simply by adding additional \file{lbx} files. There is no need for centralized mapping. If you need support for, say, Portuguese (babel/polyglossia: \file{portuges}), you create a file named \path{portuges.lbx}. If \sty{babel}/\sty{polyglossia} offered an alias named \texttt{brasil}, you would create \path{brasil.lbx} and inherit the data from \path{portuges.lbx}. In contrast to that, the point of \cmd{DeclareLanguageMapping} is handling \emph{stylistic} variants like <humanities vs. natural sciences> or <\acr{mla} vs. \acr{apa}> etc. which will typically be built on top of existing \file{lbx} files.
 
 \subsubsection{Grouping}
 \label{aut:cav:grp}
@@ -10270,7 +10494,7 @@ In a citation or bibliography style, you may need to set flags or store certain
 
 \item The entire list of references printed by \cmd{printbibliography} and similar commands is processed in a group. Each entry in the list is processed in an additional group which encloses the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment} as well as all driver code.
 
-\item The entire list of shorthands printed by \cmd{printshorthands} is processed in a group. Each entry in the list is processed in an additional group which encloses the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment} as well as all driver code.
+\item The entire bibliography list printed by \cmd{printbiblist} is processed in a group. Each entry in the list is processed in an additional group which encloses the \prm{item code} of \cmd{defbibenvironment} as well as all driver code.
 
 \item All citation commands defined with \cmd{DeclareCiteCommand} are processed in a group holding the complete citation code consisting of the \prm{precode}, \prm{sepcode}, \prm{loopcode}, and \prm{postcode} arguments. The \prm{loopcode} is enclosed in an additional group every time it is executed. If any \prm{wrapper} code has been specified, the entire unit consisting of the wrapper code and the citation code is wrapped in an additional group.
 
@@ -10287,7 +10511,7 @@ Note that using \cmd{aftergroup} in citation and bibliography styles is unreliab
 \subsubsection{Namespaces}
 \label{aut:cav:nam}
 
-In order to minimize the risk of name clashes, \latex packages typically prefix the names of internal macros with a short string specific to the package. For example, if the \sty{foobar} package requires a macro for internal use, it would typically be called \cmd{FB@macro} or \cmd{foo@macro} rather than \cmd{macro} or \cmd{@macro}. Here is a list of the prefixes used or recommended by \sty{biblatex}:
+In order to minimize the risk of name clashes, \latex packages typically prefix the names of internal macros with a short string specific to the package. For example, if the \sty{foobar} package requires a macro for internal use, it would typically be called \cmd{FB@macro} or \cmd{foo@macro} rather than \cmd{macro} or \cmd{@macro}. Here is a list of the prefixes used or recommended by \biblatex:
 
 \begin{marglist}
 
@@ -10993,12 +11217,25 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 
 \begin{changelog}
 
+\begin{release}{2.9a}{2014}
+\item \texttt{resetnumbers} now allows passing a number to reset to\see{use:bib:bib}
+\end{release}
+
+\begin{release}{2.9}{2014-02-25}
+\item Generalised shorthands facility\see{use:bib:biblist}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Sorting locales can now be defined as part of a sorting scheme\see{aut:ctm:srt}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \bibfield{sortinithash}\see{aut:bbx:fld:gen}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added Slovene localisation (Tea Tušar and Bogdan Filipič)
+\item Added \cmd{mkbibitalic}\see{aut:fmt:ich}
+\item Recommend \texttt{begentry} and \texttt{finentry} bibliography macros\see{aut:bbx:drv}
+\end{release}
+
 \begin{release}{2.8a}{2013-11-25}
-\item Split option \opt{language=auto} into \opt{language=autocite} and \opt{language=autobib}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
+\item Split option \opt{language=auto} into \opt{language=autocite} and \opt{language=autobib}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}\BiberOnlyMark
 \end{release}
 
 \begin{release}{2.8}{2013-10-21}
-\item New \bibfield{langidopts}\see{bib:fld:spc}
+\item New \bibfield{langidopts}\see{bib:fld:spc}\BiberOnlyMark
 \item \bibfield{hyphenation} field renamed to \bibfield{langid}\see{bib:fld:spc}
 \item \sty{polyglossia} support
 \item Renamed \opt{babel} option to \opt{autolang}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
@@ -11027,9 +11264,9 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 
 \begin{release}{2.6}{2013-04-30}
 \item Added \cmd{printunit}\see{aut:pct:new}
-\item Added field \bibfield{clonesourcekey}\see{aut:bbx:fld:gen}
-\item New options for \cmd{DeclareLabelalphaTemplate}\see{aut:ctm:lab} 
-\item Added \cmd{DeclareLabeldate} and retired \cmd{DeclareLabelyear}\see{aut:ctm:fld}
+\item Added field \bibfield{clonesourcekey}\see{aut:bbx:fld:gen}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item New options for \cmd{DeclareLabelalphaTemplate}\see{aut:ctm:lab}\BiberOnlyMark
+\item Added \cmd{DeclareLabeldate} and retired \cmd{DeclareLabelyear}\see{aut:ctm:fld}\BiberOnlyMark
 \item Added \texttt{nodate} localization string\see{aut:lng:key:msc}
 \item Added \cmd{rangelen}\see{aut:aux:msc}
 \item Added starred variants of \cmd{citeauthor} and \cmd{Citeauthor}\see{use:cit:txt}
@@ -11149,8 +11386,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Removed local options \opt{maxitems}/\opt{minitems} from \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Removed local options \opt{maxnames}/\opt{minnames} from \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
 \item Removed local options \opt{maxitems}/\opt{minitems} from \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Removed local options \opt{maxnames}/\opt{minnames} from \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-\item Removed local options \opt{maxitems}/\opt{minitems} from \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+\item Removed local options \opt{maxnames}/\opt{minnames} from \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+\item Removed local options \opt{maxitems}/\opt{minitems} from \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 \item Added special field format \bibfield{volcitevolume}\see{use:cit:spc}
 \item Added special field format \bibfield{volcitepages}\see{use:cit:spc}
 \item Added special field \bibfield{hash}\see{aut:bbx:fld:gen}\BiberOnlyMark
@@ -11337,7 +11574,7 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 \item Added \cmd{entrydata*}\see{aut:bib:dat}
 \item Added \cmd{RequireBiber}\see{aut:aux:msc}
 \item Added option \opt{check} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-\item Added option \opt{check} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+\item Added option \opt{check} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 \item Added \cmd{defbibcheck}\see{use:bib:flt}
 \item Updated support for Portuguese (José Carlos Santos)
 \item Fixed conflict with \sty{titletoc}
@@ -11457,7 +11694,7 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 %\item Added option \opt{bibwarn}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 %\item Added \cmd{printbibheading}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{env} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-%\item Added option \opt{env} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{env} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Added \cmd{defbibenvironment}\see{use:bib:hdg}
 %\item Removed \env{thebibliography}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
 %\item Removed \env{theshorthands}\see{aut:bbx:bbx}
@@ -11542,16 +11779,16 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 %\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{authoryear}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
 %\item Improved bibliography style \texttt{verbose}\see{use:xbx:bbx}
 %\item Added option \opt{title} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:bib}
-%\item Added option \opt{title} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{title} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Extended \cmd{defbibheading}\see{use:bib:hdg}
-%\item Added options \opt{subtype}/\opt{notsubtype} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added options \opt{subtype}/\opt{notsubtype} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added options \opt{subtype}/\opt{notsubtype} to \cmd{printbibliography}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added options \opt{subtype}/\opt{notsubtype} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Added test \opt{subtype} to \cmd{defbibfilter}\see{use:bib:flt}
-%\item Added option \opt{segment} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added options \opt{type}/\opt{nottype} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added options \opt{keyword}/\opt{notkeyword} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added options \opt{category}/\opt{notcategory} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added option \opt{filter} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{segment} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added options \opt{type}/\opt{nottype} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added options \opt{keyword}/\opt{notkeyword} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added options \opt{category}/\opt{notcategory} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added option \opt{filter} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Added \cmd{footcitetext}\see{use:cit:std}
 %\item Added \cmd{footcitetexts}\see{use:cit:mlt}
 %\item Added \cmd{ftvolcite}\see{use:cit:spc}
@@ -11964,7 +12201,7 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 %\item Added package option \opt{citereset}\see{use:opt:pre:gen}
 %\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-%\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{section} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Extended documentation of \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
 %\item Added \cmd{newrefsection}\see{use:bib:sec}
 %\item Added \cmd{newrefsegment}\see{use:bib:seg}
@@ -12109,8 +12346,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 %\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added option \opt{minitems} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Added counter \cnt{maxitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
 %\item Added counter \cnt{minitems}\see{aut:fmt:ilc}
 %\item Added adapted headings for \sty{scrartcl}, \sty{scrbook}, \sty{scrreprt}\see{int:pre:cmp}
@@ -12209,8 +12446,8 @@ This revision history is a list of changes relevant to users of this package. Ch
 %\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbysegment}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
 %\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{bibbycategory}\see{use:bib:bib}
-%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
-%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:los}
+%\item Added option \opt{maxnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
+%\item Added option \opt{minnames} to \cmd{printshorthands}\see{use:bib:biblist}
 %\item Renamed \env{bibsection} to \env{refsection} (conflict with \sty{memoir})\see{use:bib:sec}
 %\item Renamed \env{bibsegment} to \env{refsegment} (consistency)\see{use:bib:seg}
 %\item Extended \env{refsection} environment\see{use:bib:sec}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..35ff0d28af3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
index c09a7d5152e..c221513af60 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/01-introduction.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4319601a780
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
index 5c5446099e8..30097f0b5c9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/02-annotations.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..81e6b52e807
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..19bd7fd1f3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.tex
index c57d824b85b..fd0541ec57c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/03-localization-keys.tex
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@
 %\usepackage[nynorsk]{babel}
 %\usepackage[polish]{babel}
 %\usepackage[portuguese]{babel}
+%\usepackage[slovene]{babel}
 %\usepackage[spanish]{babel}
 %\usepackage[swedish]{babel}
 % - UTF-8
@@ -38,6 +39,7 @@
 \usepackage[autostyle]{csquotes}
 \DeclareQuoteAlias{spanish}{catalan}
 \DeclareQuoteAlias{croatian}{polish}
+\DeclareQuoteAlias{croatian}{slovene}
 \usepackage[backend=biber]{biblatex}
 \usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
 
@@ -557,6 +559,7 @@ Other expressions frequently used in citations:
 \keyitem{langpolish} The language <Polish>.
 \keyitem{langportuguese} The language <Portuguese>.
 \keyitem{langrussian} The language <Russian>.
+\keyitem{langslovene} The language <Slovene>.
 \keyitem{langspanish} The language <Spanish>.
 \keyitem{langswedish} The language <Swedish>.
 \end{keylist}
@@ -582,6 +585,7 @@ The following strings are intended for use in phrases like <translated from [the
 \keyitem{frompolish} The expression <from [the] Polish>.
 \keyitem{fromportuguese} The expression <from [the] Portuguese>.
 \keyitem{fromrussian} The expression <from [the] Russian>.
+\keyitem{fromslovene} The expression <from [the] Slovene>.
 \keyitem{fromspanish} The expression <from [the] Spanish>.
 \keyitem{fromswedish} The expression <from [the] Swedish>.
 \end{keylist}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b409e81b040
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
index 7e643fe848b..69f88d78270 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/10-references-per-section.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..90fbc56fa54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
index 2516fd6f9ce..9c2ed931a44 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/11-references-by-section.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2c7dd0c8fab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
index 5d777eb463b..e2bc9010d9c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/12-references-by-segment.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..86e2077a8f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
index 0968c1f412e..ccf2300377f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/13-references-by-keyword.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3a87a445784
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
index 47bcded8181..4a4786a9a13 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/14-references-by-category.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9df8e5c5aef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
index 76c5ea47176..a44dab94e9e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/15-references-by-type.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..67d388211bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
index 1b224a22a75..833a9d1c24f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/16-numeric-prefixed-1.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9cad8d32d08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
index 35097f27d2d..dba3e4218d7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/17-numeric-prefixed-2.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6b6686f6294
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
index 32225b57630..e51cf4e12ca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/18-numeric-hybrid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f82df549e6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf
index 54af31fcb0b..da16205e51f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/19-alphabetic-prefixed.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b3c46b73fe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single.pdf
index fa30d6b1a1b..5857fbdcfa7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/20-indexing-single.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c329f5ae459
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple.pdf
index 940b0590293..d2c400155f0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/21-indexing-multiple.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..623581637f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry.pdf
index 0909dec8697..b1ddc180b4c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/22-indexing-subentry.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3db7aaaab18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
index 237d31ea898..f947df523b1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/30-style-numeric.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..77a3b8fbf53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
index 1622aaad187..cf0b4c64038 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/31-style-numeric-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8e860c89d89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
index b31569c6749..141a2626dfd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/32-style-numeric-verb.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c8901188e0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
index f0e103bd16f..23b923fcb69 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/40-style-alphabetic.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c45566b68c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
index bd538a8b143..3317a204d0b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/41-style-alphabetic-verb.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7405e8b58ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.pdf
index df59eed646b..9350caf4e38 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/42-style-alphabetic-template.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..12b94699917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
index 52add3b353b..98d7b53e3cb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/50-style-authoryear.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2176417661e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
index 449926d8cd5..0977ae7ede5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/51-style-authoryear-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a0d0fc538db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
index e0af1b85ce1..0418cf8b16b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/52-style-authoryear-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aa12525b1bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
index 8b07ff76f2d..a393d821c44 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/53-style-authoryear-icomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..435a51b2823
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
index c258ce79478..ce2d9087ee3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/60-style-authortitle.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4bdea7aa2ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
index ea94da985a0..4c8c790b308 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/61-style-authortitle-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c752967805a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
index cc5f9360726..609fcd796ca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/62-style-authortitle-comp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1ad56b94424
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
index 5428887449c..335969f80d3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/63-style-authortitle-icomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..26890203454
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
index 15de72b0142..aa933d974ea 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/64-style-authortitle-terse.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6179d094298
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
index 50eb06949d2..e8add0b0bea 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/65-style-authortitle-tcomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5ae7fec8531
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
index fbbf538abd3..27a9e61da9c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/66-style-authortitle-ticomp.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e3434a18758
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
index 95bd617e079..978160bc9a1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/70-style-verbose.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0ef729cce7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
index d92ee7664e2..420f2068305 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/71-style-verbose-ibid.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1c1d5835438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
index c20d47755e3..4c84b27426b 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/72-style-verbose-note.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..79256d15ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
index 52d2d07daa8..3ffd99dbd45 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/73-style-verbose-inote.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..47a9b185a4a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
index ede9a4054b2..00cdf88fb84 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/74-style-verbose-trad1.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..f6f37a0617f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
index 1e60e0ff6a6..3f67a41f440 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/75-style-verbose-trad2.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8bd1e14a49a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
index d3bea5a1b1f..0820a4837ef 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/76-style-verbose-trad3.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e8908c87e55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
index ce198b94025..3f1f26c6aca 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/80-style-reading.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..aac1f76cf0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
index 6730dec0a4c..12cd468d025 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/81-style-draft.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a61aac1e5cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug-bibtex.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
index 837b78d31a8..6f183c9f848 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/82-style-debug.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/90-related-entries.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/90-related-entries.pdf
index dbea075c7b3..13d59de1a93 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/90-related-entries.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/90-related-entries.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/91-sorting-schemes.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/91-sorting-schemes.pdf
index efa3341cae6..a1a3cfa0a9d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/91-sorting-schemes.pdf
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/91-sorting-schemes.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97c12f242f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.pdf
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..829d87be6e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/92-bibliographylists.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+%
+% This file demonstrates the facilities for printing arbitrary bibliography
+% lists containing information about abbreviations etc.
+%
+\documentclass[a4paper]{article}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[american]{babel}
+\usepackage{csquotes}
+\usepackage[style=authoryear,backend=biber]{biblatex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\addbibresource{biblatex-examples.bib}
+
+% This is needed as printbiblist looks for a driver named after the biblist
+% name
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{shorttitle}{%
+  \printfield{title}}
+
+% This is optional. If no sorting scheme is specified to \printbiblist, a
+% sorting scheme with the same name as the biblist is used if found.
+% Otherwise as a last resort the global sorting scheme is used
+\DeclareSortingScheme{shorttitle}{
+  \sort{
+    \field{shorttitle}
+  }
+}
+
+% This is optional and in fact equivalent to the automatically created
+% filter for all field like "shorttitle" which are declared as "label
+% fields" in the data model. However, if you define it, you can overwrite
+% the default definition which is shown here
+\DeclareBiblistFilter{shorttitle}{
+  \filter[type=field,filter=shorttitle]
+}
+
+% biblatex also creates automatically a "shorttitle" bibliography
+% environment (using \defbibenvironment) which is used by default. You can
+% either redefine this or use the "env" option to \printbiblist to use
+% another one instead.
+
+% The default "biblist" heading is used for all bibliography lists. This
+% can be changed using the "heading" option to \printbiblist
+
+\begin{document}
+\nocite{*}
+
+\printshorthands% With biber, just an alias for \printbiblist{shorthand}
+\printbiblist[title={Title Shorthands}]{shorttitle}
+\printbibliography
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
index ca78376c7cc..9bd2950221f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex/examples/biblatex-examples.bib
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 
 @article{aksin,
   author       = {Aks{\i}n, {\"O}zge and T{\"u}rkmen, Hayati and Artok, Levent
-                  and {\k{C}}etinkaya, Bekir and Ni, Chaoying and
+                  and {\c{C}}etinkaya, Bekir and Ni, Chaoying and
                   B{\"u}y{\"u}kg{\"u}ng{\"o}r, Orhan and {\"O}zkal, Erhan},
   title        = {Effect of immobilization on catalytic characteristics of
                   saturated Pd-N-heterocyclic carbenes in Mizoroki-Heck
@@ -57,8 +57,8 @@
 
 @article{angenendt,
   author       = {Angenendt, Arnold},
-  title        = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- "<Vom Sinn und Unsinn der
-                  Patrozinienkunde">},
+  title        = {In Honore Salvatoris~-- Vom Sinn und Unsinn der
+                  Patrozinienkunde},
   journaltitle = {Revue d'Histoire Eccl{\'e}siastique},
   date         = 2002,
   volume       = 97,
@@ -548,7 +548,7 @@
   part         = 2,
   series       = {Bollingen Series},
   number       = 75,
-  publisher    = {Routledge and Kegan Paul},
+  publisher    = {Routledge {and} Kegan Paul},
   location     = {London},
   langid       = {english},
   langidopts   = {variant=british},
@@ -840,7 +840,7 @@
   title        = {Argonauts of the Western Pacific},
   date         = 1972,
   edition      = 8,
-  publisher    = {Routledge and Kegan Paul},
+  publisher    = {Routledge {and} Kegan Paul},
   location     = {London},
   langid       = {english},
   langidopts   = {variant=british},
@@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@
                   People},
   year         = 1899,
   series       = {English and American drama of the Nineteenth Century},
-  publisher    = {Leonard Smithers and Company},
+  publisher    = {Leonard Smithers {and} Company},
   eprint       = {4HIWAAAAYAAJ},
   eprinttype   = {googlebooks},
   annotation   = {A \texttt{book} with \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{eprinttype}